Panasonic DVD Recorder WJ HD309 User Manual

Digital Disk Recorders

Operating Instructions

WJ-HD309

Model Nos.

WJ-HD316

MONITOR1

TIMER

ONITOR2

ALARM

ERROR

STOP

PLAY

SHIFT

PAUSE

ALARM

REC-

REC STOP

SUSPEND

SEQ

ALARM

RESET

PAN/

TILT

OSD

GOTO

LAST

REV

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

PULL

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

COPY

FWD

TEXT

A-B

REPEAT

OPERATE

MARK

SETUP

/ESC

HDD

10/0

IRIS

HDD

LISTED

－

LOGOUT

PRESET

/AUTO

＋

BUSY

SET

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

316

Before attempting to connect or operate this product,

please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not use near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that

produce heat.

9) Do not misuse the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A

grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your

safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being stepped on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenient receptacles and the points

where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a

cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-overs.

S3125A

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,

such as when the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,

the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

CONTENTS

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ..................... 3

OPERATION USING A PC .......................................... 62

■ Features ................................................................ 62

■ System Requirements of a PC .............................. 62

INSTALLATION IN THE RACK ................................... 63

MANAGEMENT OF USERS/HOSTS .......................... 64

OPERATING THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME ........ 66

Preparation for maintenance (HDD replacement,

installation, etc.) ........................................................... 67

CONNECTIONS .......................................................... 69

■ Connections when the unit is used

PREFACE .................................................................... 5

FEATURES .................................................................. 5

PRECAUTIONS ........................................................... 6

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED

TRADEMARKS ............................................................ 7

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ......................................... 7

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND

THEIR FUNCTIONS .................................................... 8

■ Front View ............................................................. 8

■ Rear View ............................................................. 10

■ On the Monitor 1 (To display only live image) ....... 11

■ On the Monitor 2

independently ........................................................ 69

■ Connections with an extension unit ...................... 70

■ Connections with DVD-RAM, CD-R, and

(To display live or recorded image) ....................... 12

STARTUP .................................................................... 16

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT ............................................... 17

SHUTDOWN ................................................................ 18

RECORDING (Manual Recording) .............................. 19

RECORDING (Emergency Recording) ........................ 21

PLAYBACK .................................................................. 22

PLAYBACK IMAGE ON A DESIGNATED DISK .......... 25

PLAYBACK FROM A DESIGNATED

DVD-R drives ........................................................ 71

■ Connections with the VCR .................................... 72

■ Connections with PS·Data systems ...................... 73

■ Cascade connection of multiple units ................... 75

■ Connection with the RS485 camera ..................... 79

■ Mode Switch ......................................................... 81

■ RS485 Port ........................................................... 81

■ How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM/

CONTROL Connector ........................................... 82

■ How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM

TIME AND DATE ......................................................... 27

SEARCH AND PLAY ................................................... 28

■ Searching For a Recording Event and Playback

(Recording Event Search) ..................................... 28

■ Searching for a motion detected time and date from

recorded images and play it (VMD search) ........... 32

■ To delete the motion detection area ..................... 36

■ Searching for a marked point and play from that

point (Marking search) .......................................... 37

MONITOR LIVE IMAGES ............................................ 38

■ Displaying Live Images on a Single Screen .......... 38

■ Electronic Zoom .................................................... 38

■ Displaying on a Multi-screen ................................. 39

■ Sequential Display ................................................ 40

CONTROL CAMERAS ................................................ 41

■ Panning/Tilting ...................................................... 41

■ Zoom ..................................................................... 41

■ Focus .................................................................... 41

■ Iris ......................................................................... 42

■ Preset Action ......................................................... 42

■ Move a camera to the preset position ................... 43

■ Auto Function (Auto Pan, etc) ............................... 44

ABOUT THE EVENT FUNCTION ................................ 45

■ Action at an event occurrence .............................. 45

■ Alarm Function ...................................................... 46

■ Cancel the Alarm Action ....................................... 47

■ Suspend the Alarm Actions ................................... 47

COPYING (Duplicate) .................................................. 48

DELETE DATA ON THE DISK .................................... 50

■ Deletion of recorded images saved on the

Connector ............................................................. 86

■ How to Use the SERIAL Connector ...................... 88

SETUP ......................................................................... 89

■ Item list of the SETUP MENU ............................... 89

■ About the SETUP MENU ...................................... 91

■ Basic Operation with the SETUP MENU .............. 92

■ [Maintenance] Functions for Maintaining .............. 93

■ [Recording] ............................................................ 97

■ [Event] Function for Events ................................... 99

■ [Schedule] Settings for the recording/

event action schedule ......................................... 104

■ [Switcher] Settings for the switcher function ....... 109

■ [Display] .............................................................. 112

■ [Comm] Settings for communication with other

devices ................................................................ 115

■ [System] Settings on System .............................. 120

DISPLAY SETUP MENU OF CAMERA ..................... 126

DISK MANAGEMENT ................................................ 127

■ Notes on hard disk .............................................. 127

■ How to replace the built-in hard disk ................... 127

■ About the HDD DISK MENU ............................... 130

■ Display of the HDD DISK MENU ........................ 130

■ RAID 5 Function of the Extension Unit ............... 131

■ Formatting (Initialization) the Hard Disk .............. 132

■ Setting for Mirroring ............................................ 136

SERIAL (RS232C) CONNECTOR COMMAND

REFERENCE ............................................................. 140

■ SERIAL (RS232C) Communication Protocol ...... 140

■ Command Format ............................................... 140

FLOWCHART OF THE SETUP MENU ...................... 150

PARAMETERS AND THE DEFAULT SETTINGS

hard disk manually ................................................ 50

FORMAT (INITIALIZE) A DVD-RAM DISK .................. 52

DISPLAY/EDIT TEXT INFORMATION ........................ 54

ERROR/WARNINGS ................................................... 56

OPERATION USING A SYSTEM CONTROLLER ...... 58

OF THE SETUP MENU ............................................. 151

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 157

SPECIFICATION ....................................................... 161

STANDARD ACCESSORIES .................................... 162

PREFACE

The Digital Disk Recorders WJ-HD316/309 are designed for

use within a surveillance system and are a combination of a

hard disk recorder and a video multiplexer (16-input for the

WJ-HD316, 9-input for the WJ-HD309).

The digital hard disk recorder is a recording device using a

hard disk drive to record camera pictures instead of using

videotapes so that pictures recorded by repeated overwrit-

ing will not cause deterioration of the recorded picture qual-

ity. Up to 16 cameras can be connected to the WJ-HD316

directly (up to 9 cameras to the WJ-HD309) and it is possi-

ble to record their camera pictures. It is also possible to

display four or more camera pictures on a single monitor, to

switch camera pictures, and to operate cameras using this

unit.

FEATURES

Various Recording Functions

Remote Operation via Network

• Multi-Recording

It is possible to operate this unit using a PC connected to a

LAN (Local Area Network) or the Internet by the featured

network function.

It is possible to perform multiple recording using a sin-

gle digital disk recorder even if the operating environ-

ments are different, for example, recording pictures of

cameras in different places at different times.

Security Function and Reliability

• Schedule recording

• Authentication function (registration of ID and pass-

word) allows users access to a predetermined selection

of the available functions. Up to 32 users can be regis-

tered.

It is possible to perform recording automatically at a

scheduled time on a designated day of the week.

Schedules can be set on each camera.

• Emergency Recording

• If alteration of a recorded image data is made for any

reason, the alteration alert function will announce it.

In case of emergency, emergency recording will be

given a higher priority than other recording modes by

operating an external switch.

• If a hard disk crashes, the backup function^*1, the mirror-

ing function^*2and the RAID 5 function^*3prevent there

being any data loss.

• External Timer Recording

It is possible to perform recording automatically using

an external timer.

^*1: Only when the recommended DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R

drive or CD-R drive is used

^*2: The mirroring function does not work with an external

hard disk drive such as an extension unit.

^*3: To use the RAID 5 function, an optional extension unit is

required.

• Event Recording

At an event occurrence, such as when an alarm signal

is supplied, the recording mode (quality and recording

rate) can be changed to high quality to record pictures.

• Motion Detection Function (VMD)

It is possible to start recording automatically when

motion is detected in a shooting area.

Transmission with Coaxial Cable, PS·Data and

RS485 Compatible

• It is possible to control a Panasonic combination cam-

era such as the WV-CS850 using only a coaxial cable

but not other devices. Using a coaxial cable also com-

pensates for transmission loss.

• It is easy to establish the surveillance system by con-

necting a PS·Data compatible system controller and

peripherals.

Frame Switcher Function

• It is possible to display pictures of four or more cam-

eras on a single monitor (multi-screen) splitting the

monitor screen into 4, 7, 9, 10, 13, or 16 sections using

the WJ-HD316, and into 4, 7, or 9 sections using the

WJ-HD309.

While monitoring a multi-screen, each camera picture

will be displayed as a moving image.

PRECAUTIONS

• Refer all work related to the installation of these

products to qualified service personnel or system

installers.

Hard disk drives are perishable. They will need to be

replaced after around 20 000 - 30 000 hours of opera-

tion in case they are used at temperature of 25 °C

(77 °F).

• Do not operate the appliances beyond their speci-

fied temperature, humidity, or power source ratings.

Use the appliance at temperatures within +5°C -

+45°C (41°F - 133°F) and humidity below 85 %.

The input power source for this appliance is 120 V AC

60 Hz.

Replacement costs of the hard disk drives are not cov-

ered by the warranty even if it needs to be done within

the warranty period. Consult your dealer for servicing.

Set all the hard disk drives as master using the jumper

pin. Refer to the diagram attached on the HDD or the

operating instructions of the HDD for the jumper pin

assignment.

• Handle the appliance with care.

Do not strike or shake, as this may damage the appli-

ance.

When hard disk drive trouble occurs, replace it immedi-

ately. Consult your dealer for servicing.

When replacing the hard disk drives, take notice that

the following.

• Do not strike or give a strong shock to the unit.

It may cause damage or allow water to enter the unit.

Do not detach the hard disk drives or the cables con-

necting the unit and the front cover while the

HDD1/HDD2 indicators are lit or for around 30 seconds

after the indicators go off.

• Built-in backup battery

Before the first use, charge the built-in backup battery

by turning on the power for 48 hours or more.

If it is not charged enough, in a case where the power

goes down, the internal clock may keep bad time or the

operative condition may be different to that before the

electric power failure.

The built-in battery life is approximately 5 years. Ask the

shop where you purchased the unit when replacement

of the battery is required.

Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

Do not stack them, or keep them upright.

Do not use an electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 kgf · cm))

Avoid rapid changes of the temperature/humidity to

prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: within

15°C/h (59°F/h))

• Indication label

Refer to the indication labels placed on the top and bot-

tom of the unit as to the indications of equipment classi-

fication and power source, etc.

• Cooling Fan

Turn the power off when cleaning the unit. Otherwise it

may cause injuries.

Replacement costs of the cooling fan are not covered

by the warranty even if it needs to be done within the

warranty period. Consult your dealer for servicing.

• Avoid placing receptacles that contain liquids such as

water near the unit.

If liquid spills onto the unit, it may cause fire or an elec-

tric shock.

• Cleaning

Turn the power off when cleaning the unit. Otherwise it

may cause injuries.

• Do not expose the unit to water or moisture, or try to

operate it in wet areas.

Do not use strong or abrasive detergents when clean-

ing the appliance body.

• Prevent condensation from forming on the surface of

the hard disk.

Use a dry cloth to clean the appliance when it is dirty.

When the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent

and wipe gently.

Wait until the dew evaporates in any of the following

cases.

The recorder is moved to a place significantly different

in temperature or humidity.

• Built-in hard disk drives

Hard disk drives are vulnerable to vibration. Handle

them with care.

It is possible to damage them if they are moved while

their motors are still running. Do not move them just

after turning the power of them on or off (for around 30

seconds).

The recorder is moved out of an air-conditioned room.

The recorder is placed in an extremely humid place.

The recorder is placed in a room where a heater has

just been turned on.

• We recommend that you make a note of your settings

and save them. This will help when you are required to

change the system configuration, or when unexpected

trouble or failure occurs.

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED TRADEMARKS

• Adobe, Adobe logos, and Acrobat are registered trade-

marks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/

or other countries.

About These Operating Instructions

There are 3 operating instructions for the WJ-HD316/WJ-

HD309 as follows.

• Operating Instructions (book, these operating instruc-

tions)

• Network Operating Instructions (PDF)

• Network Setup Instructions (PDF)

• Microsoft, Windows and Windows XP are registered

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or

other countries.

• Other names of companies and products contained in

these operating instructions may be trademarks or reg-

istered trademarks of their respective owners.

These "Operating Instructions" contain descriptions of how

to operate this unit with the buttons on the front panel.

Refer to the "Network Operating Instructions" on the provid-

ed CD-ROM for descriptions of how to operate this unit

from a PC.

Refer to the "Network Setup Instructions" on the provided

CD-ROM for descriptions of how to perform the required

settings and how to connect to other devices.

• Distributing, copying, disassembling, reverse compil-

ing, reverse engineering, and also exporting in violation

of export laws of the software provided with this prod-

uct, is expressly prohibited.

Adobe^®Reader is required to read these operating instruc-

tions (PDF) on the provided CD-ROM. When the Adobe^®

Reader is not installed on the PC, download the latest

Adobe^®Reader from the Adobe web site and install it.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC INDUSTRI-

AL CO., LTD. BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PER-

SON, EXCEPT FOR REPLACEMENT OR REASONABLE

MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR THE CASES,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:

(2) PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY

INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION

OF THE USER;

(3) UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR MODIFI-

CATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;

(4) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,

OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYS-

TEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY.

(1) ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM-

ITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSE-

QUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR

RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

■ Front View

! ! @

! ! ! !

qw er yu i

@ @ @

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

VIDEO

OUT

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

REPEAT

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

[WJ-HD316]

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

HDD

SET

BUSY

! !! @

@ @

! ! @

! ! ! !

qw er yu i

@ @ @

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

OSD

VIDEO

OUT

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

REPEAT

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

[WJ-HD309]

COPY

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

AUDIO

OUT

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

HDD

SET

BUSY

!! @

@ @

q Operate Indicator (OPERATE)

Lights up when the power is turned on.

u HDD Access Indicators (HDD1/HDD2)

Blinks when the HDD1 or the HDD2 is accessed

respectively.

w Alarm Suspension Indicator (ALARM SUSPEND)

Lights up when the alarm suspension mode is selected.

i Monitor Switch button (MONITOR1/MONITOR2)

Pressing this button switches the monitor. This button

lights up when monitor 1 is selected, and goes off when

monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected.

e Alarm Indicator (ALARM)

Blinks when an alarm occurs, and lights steadily when

the activated alarm is reset automatically.

To turn this indicator off, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

o Shift Button (SHIFT)

Toggles the functions of the camera selection buttons.

r Alarm Reset Button (ALARM RESET)

Pressing this button cancels alarm activation, and

returns the system to the condition before the alarm

was activated.

! Camera Selection Buttons ([1] - [10/0], [11] - [16] for

the WJ-HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309)

Pressing a button displays live or playback images of

the selected camera. The LED in the button indicates

the status as follows.

t Error indicator (ERROR)

Green: When a button is lit green, the currently dis-

played image on the monitor is live from a respec-

tive camera.

Blinks orange when an error occurs that will not keep

the unit from running.

Blinks red when an error occurs that may cause the

system to go down.

Orange: When a button is lit orange, the image from a

respective camera is recorded.

Refer to page 56 for further information about error/

warnings.

Blue: When a button is lit blue, the currently displayed

image on the monitor is live from a respective cam-

era and is also recorded.

y Timer Indicator (TIMER)

Lights up when the schedule recording is set, and

blinks while the schedule recording is being performed.

When the shift button is lit, these buttons work as the

toggled function buttons.

(The buttons available as the toggled function buttons

will light green when the shift button is lit.)

@ Set Button (SET)

Works differently depending on the situations listed

below:

• Plays recorded images at the current playback speed

when this button is pressed during fast playback.

• Registers preset positions of cameras.

• Activates the auto focus function.

• Sets the alarm suspension mode on/off.

• Determines the setting of parameters on the setup

menus.

! Pan, Tilt, Latest Recorded Image Playback Button

(PAN/TILT, GO TO LAST)

Pans/tilts a selected camera, or plays back the latest

recorded image.

(Refer to page 41 and 23 respectively.)

! Zoom, Focus, A - B Repeat Button (ZOOM/FOCUS,

A-B REPEAT)

@ Jog Dial

Works differently depending on the situations as fol-

lows:

• Plays recorded images frame by frame when this dial is

rotated during pausing playback.

• Skips playback time when this dial is rotated during

playback at normal speed.

Zooms in/out, adjusts focus, or repeats playback of

recorded images between two designated points.

(Refer to page 41 and 24 respectively.)

! Iris, Listing Button (IRIS, LISTED)

Adjusts iris, or enables/disables the filtering playback.

(Refer to page 42 and 28 respectively.)

• Moves the cursor on the searching menu or the thumb-

nail menu.

• Selects a parameter setting or a character on the setup

menus.

! Preset, Auto Pan Button (PRESET/AUTO)

Moves a camera to the preset position, or activates the

auto function.

@ Shuttle Ring

(Refer to page 42 and 44 respectively.)

Works differently depending on the situations as fol-

lows:

! Stop Button (STOP)

• Plays fast when this dial is rotated during playback at

normal speed.

Stops playback.

• Turns the searching menu pages or the thumbnail

menu pages.

! Play/Pause Button (PLAY/PAUSE)

Plays recorded images, or pauses playback.

@ Connectors Cover

! Record Button (REC/REC STOP)

Starts recording. To stop recording, press this button

down for 2 seconds or more.

@ Copy Port (COPY2)

Connect a recommended DVD-RAM drive, CD-R drive

or DVD-R drive with this port.

! Slow Button (SLOW)

Pans/tilts a selected camera slowly.

@ S-Video Output Connector (S-VIDEO)

Connect the S-video input connector of a VCR with this

connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be sup-

plied to this connector.

! Search Button (SEARCH)

Displays the searching menu.

@ Setup, Escape Button (SETUP/ESC)

Displays the setup menu, or turns back to a previous

page of the setup menu, etc.

@ Video Output Connector (VIDEO OUT)

Connect the video input connector of a VCR with this

connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be sup-

plied to this connector.

@ Busy Indicator (BUSY)

Lights when a selected camera was not available to

operate because another user is operating it using a

controller or a PC via a network. In this case, wait until

this indicator goes off.

# Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an

unbalanced –10 dBV, 600 Ω line output audio signal to

an external device.

@ Arrow Buttons (CDAB)

Adjusts zooming/focus, or moves the cursor on the

setup menus and the searching menu.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector

during playback.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT

connector on the rear panel will be supplied to this con-

nector.

■ Rear View

o !

q w

t y ui

! !

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

[WJ-HD316]

OUT

VIDEO

o !

q w

t y ui

! !

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

[WJ-HD309]

OUT

VIDEO

q Audio Input Connectors (AUDIO IN 1 - 4)

t Monitor Output Connector (MONITOR OUT1, MONI-

TOR OUT2/CASCADE OUT)

These connectors, for RCA pin jacks, accept an unbal-

anced –10 dBV, 10 kΩ line input audio signal supplied

from an external device such as a microphone amplifi-

er.

Connect monitors to these BNC connectors.

The MONITOR OUT2 connector can also be used as

the CASCADE OUT connector.

When using two or more units of the WJ-HD316/WJ-

HD309 and using the MONITOR OUT2 connector as

the CASCADE OUT connector, connect with the CAS-

CADE IN connector of another WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309.

w Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an

unbalanced –10 dBV, 600 Ω line output audio signal to

an external device.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector

during playback.

y Cascade In Connector (CASCADE IN)

Connect with the CASCADE OUT connector of another

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309 when using two or more units of

the WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309.

e Video Input Connectors (CAMERA IN 1 - 16 for the

WJ-HD316/CAMERA IN 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309)

Connect system cameras or combination cameras to

these BNC connectors.

u Serial Connector (SERIAL)

Connect a PC with this D-Sub 9-pin connector when

controlling this unit.

A 75 Ω termination is made unless the video output ter-

minal is connected.

To connect combination cameras, connect them to the

CAMERA IN 1 - 8 connectors of the WJ-HD316, or the

CAMERA IN 1 - 6 of the WJ-HD309 (accept coaxial

communication).

i Monitor Connector (MONITOR (VGA))

Connect a VGA monitor with this connector. The same

video signal supplied to the MONITOR OUT2 connector

will be supplied to this connector.

r Video Output Connectors (CAMERA OUT 1 - 16 for

the WJ-HD316/CAMERA OUT 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309)

These BNC connectors supply video signals looped

through the video input connectors.

o Alarm Connector (ALARM)

Connect an external device such as a sensor or a door

switch with this D-Sub 25-pin connector.

Note: Video signals will not be supplied from the CAM-

ERA OUT 1 - 8 connectors (CAMERA OUT 1 - 6

connectors for the WJ-HD309) if the power of the

unit is off.

! Alarm/Control Connector (ALARM/CONTROL)

Connect a control switch with this D-Sub 25-pin con-

nector when controlling this unit using an external

device, or when controlling an alarm device such as a

buzzer or a lamp.

! PS·Data Ports (DATA)

■ On the Monitor 1 (To display

Connect PS·Data compatible devices with these ports.

only live image)

! Mode Switches (MODE)

Set the operation mode of this unit with these dip

switches.

! RS485 Ports (RS485 (CAMERA))

Connect RS485 compatible combination cameras with

these ports.

! Network Port (10/100BASE-T)

Connect this unit to a network compatible with 10BASE-

T or 100BASE-Tx when controlling this unit using a PC

via a network.

! Copy Port (COPY1)

Important:

Connect a recommended DVD-RAM drive, CD-R drive

or DVD-R drive with this port.

• The SETUP MENU cannot be displayed on the monitor

• It will take around 2 minutes to display live image on the

monitor 1 after turning on the power of the unit.

! Extra Storage Port (EXT STORAGE)

Connect an optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300) with

this port.

1. Camera Title

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display a camera title can be selected

from the following.

! Power Switch (POWER)

Turns the power of this unit on and off.

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is lower right (R-

LOWER).

! Signal Ground Terminal (SIGNAL GND)

! Power Cord Inlet (AC IN)

Connect the power cord to this inlet.

Note: The camera title will be displayed with 16 charac-

ters (2 lines: 8 characters per line).

2. Time

Displays the current time (hour:minute:second) and

date (month:day:year).

A position to display the time can be selected from the

following.

Center, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right

The default time display position is lower left (L-

LOWER).

Note: When the camera title and the time display are

layered, only the time display will be displayed.

3. Alarm Display

When an alarm has occurred, an alarm display will be

displayed.

The alarm display will be displayed differently as fol-

lows depending on which alarm has occurred.

VMD-*: When motion is detected.

LOSS-*: When video loss has occurred.

COM-#: When a command alarm has occurred.

TRM-#: When a terminal alarm has occurred.

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316, 1 - 9 for

the WJ-HD309)

#: Event number

Note: Refer to page 45 for further information about

event types and event actions.

Mode 1

■ On the Monitor 2 (To display live

Displays only the main bar and the status is displayed

on it.

or recorded image)

w – A

Mode 2

Displays the status on the main bar, the left bar and the

right bar.

Notes:

• Same images displayed on monitor 2 will be displayed

on the VGA monitor.

• The camera title will be displayed with 16 characters (2

lines: 8 characters per line).

Important:

• Since the VGA output from this unit is the same as for

televisions (720 H x 480 V pixels/vertical frequency of

59.94 Hz), it may be possible that both the left and right

edges can not be fit onto the screen depending on the

VGA monitor.

• It is impossible to use the MONITOR (VGA) connector

when connecting the unit in the cascade connection.

• It may take time to display live image on the VGA moni-

tor if the VGA monitor is turned on/off during the unit is

running.

Mode 3

Displays the status only on the main bar, and does not

display information on the left bar and the right bar.

Note: Mode 2 and Mode 3 are graphic images. They

may not be as clear as Mode 1.

1. Camera Title

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display a camera title can be selected

from the following.

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is lower right (R-

LOWER).

2. Task Bar

Displays the current status.

The task bar consists of the main bar (w - A), the left

bar (w - B), and the right bar (w - C).

There are 3 different ways to display the task bar as fol-

lows.

● Status on the Task Bar

• On the Main Bar

q Status Display Area

e Live/Playback Time Display Area

t Error Display Area

w Copy/Delete Icons

r Alarm Display Area

q Status Display Area

Indicated Item

Live

Status

Indication

Indicates live image display status

: Live image is displayed

: Live images are displayed

sequentially

Playback

Indicates that playback is currently being performed

with the displayed playback speed

5: Currently playing

4: Currently playing in reverse

h: Currently pausing

: Currently playing at fast speed

: Currently playing in reverse at fast

speed

Recording

Indicates that recording is currently being performed

Indicates that searching is currently being performed

: Currently recording

: Currently searching

w Copy/Delete Icons

Indicated Item

Copy

Status

Indication

Indicates that data copy is currently being performed

: Currently copying

Delete

Indicates that data deletion is currently being per-

formed

: Currently deleting data

e Live/Playback Time Display Area

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Time

Displays time of the displayed image

When displaying live image: Current time

When playing recorded image: Time when

recorded

Year:Month:Day

Hour:Minute:Second

*: During summer time, an asterisk (*) will be dis-

played on the left side of the displayed time.

r Alarm Display Area

Indicated Item

Alarm

Status

Indication

Indicates that an alarm has occurred

VMD-*: When motion is detected

LOSS-*: When video loss has occurred

COM-*: When a command alarm has occurred

TRM-*: When a terminal alarm has occurred

Alarm type

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316, 1 - 9 for

the WJ-HD309)

#: Alarm number

Alarm is occurring currently

Note: Refer to page 45 for further information about event types and event actions.

t Error Display Area

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Error Warning

Indicates an error occurrence or warning

ALT-*: Alteration is detected

W-ERROR: Failed to write data on the HDD

SMART: Warning of the HDD malfunction

H-METER: Set time for hour-meter (active time of

the HDD) warning has passed

Error type

THERMAL: The temperature inside the unit is too

high

Error is occurring currently

POWER: A power outage has been detected

#-nn%: Warning about running out of disk space

while displaying available disk space per-

centage

#-FULL: No available disk space

MEDIUM-n: An error occurred in an external

recording device

REMOVE: The hard disk is removed from the sys-

tem automatically because of an access error

FAN: The fan is faulty

Abbreviation of partition

Status

Displayed

abbreviation

NML

EVT

CPY

Normal recording area

Event recording area

Copy area

External recording device

connected to the COPY1 port

on the rear panel

External recording device

connected to the COPY2 port

on the front panel

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316, 1 - 9

for the WJ-HD309)

#: Abbreviation that indicates partition

nn: Available disk size

CP1

CP2

n: Number of connector that an external recording

device is connected to

Note: Refer to page 56 for further information about error types and what to do when an error has occurred.

• On the Left Bar

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Camera

Indicates recording and displaying status

Gray: Camera currently not displayed or not con-

nected to a respective channel

Green: Camera displayed on the monitor

Orange: Camera currently being recorded

Blue: Camera currently being recorded and dis-

played on the monitor

Camera 1 is on the top and camera

16 is on the bottom

• On the Right Bar

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Used disk space

Indicates the available disk space of each partition.

Top: 100 % of the disk space is used (no avail-

able disk space)

Second from the top: 80 % of the disk space is

used

Center: 60 % of the disk space is used

Second from the bottom: 40 % of the disk space

is used

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Bottom: 20 % of the disk space is used

Note: When "CONTINUE" is selected on the

"Termination" page of the "Maintenance" setup

menu, available disk space will not be displayed.

Refer to a system administrator for further infor-

mation.

NML: Available disk space of the normal record-

ing area used for manual recording and

schedule recording

EVT: Available disk space of the event recording

area used for event recording and emergency

recording

STARTUP

z Insert the power plug to an outlet (AC 120 V,

c Enter a user name and password.

60 Hz)

Note: Make sure the power source is AC 120 V, 60 Hz.

x Turn on the power switch on the rear panel.

The OPERATE indicator will light and the system check

(checking the system and hard disk) will start.

The startup splash image below will be displayed on moni-

tor 2 and the VGA monitor during the system check.

Rotate the jog dial to select a character to be entered in the

cursor position.

It is also possible to enter numbers by pressing the camera

selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316, [1] - [9],

[0] for the WJ-HD309).

To move the cursor, press the arrow buttons.

Use the same method to enter or edit characters attached

to images. Refer to page 54 for further information.

Notes:

• The default user name and password are as follows:

User name: ADMIN

Password: 12345

• To enhance the security, change the password for an

administrator before start running the unit. It is recom-

mended to change the password for an administrator

periodically.

When the auto login is off, the login window will be dis-

played if any button on the front panel of this unit is pressed

after the system check. (Go to step 3)

When the auto login is on, live images will be displayed

after the system check.

Notes:

• If the hard disk configuration had been changed after

the last startup or the hard disk has problems, the HDD

DISK MENU will be displayed automatically after the

startup splash. (Refer to page 130 for further informa-

tion.)

v Display a live image.

Press the SET button to display a live image.

If the authentication (login) window is displayed, enter user

name and password.

• It is possible to display the disk configuration menu by

pressing the SET button when the image below that

says the system check has been completed is dis-

played.

When authenticated, a live image will be displayed.

When not authenticated, the authentication (login) window

will be displayed again.

Important:

When using the optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300),

turn the power of this unit after turning on the power of

all extension units.

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

It is recommended to check the clock periodically and put

the clock right if it shows the wrong time.

Adjust the clock when displaying a live image.

c Move the cursor to "Time & Date" using the

arrows button (CD), and press the SET but-

ton.

The "Time & Date" menu will be displayed.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

LIVE

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

Basic Setup

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

■

MMM.DD.YY

12H

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

Time

Date

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

User Regist.

User Edit

REPEAT

JAN

12 00 00

–

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

IRIS

■

LISTED

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

10/0

AUTO

■

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

SET

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

BUSY

xcv cb v

v Move the cursor to "Time Format" using the

arrows button and set the time (Month, Day,

Year, Time) using the jog dial.

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Basic Setup

LIVE

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12H

■

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

Time

Date

LIVE

Comm

User Regist.

User Edit

JAN

12 00 00

SET

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

OFF

12 :00 AM

AUTO

CAM

1ips

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

■

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

■

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

b Move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET

button.

x Move the cursor to "System" using the arrows

The selected date format and the set time will be applied.

button (CDAB) and press the SET button.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

■

MMM.DD.YY

12H

Time

Date

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

*****

PSD User

ADMIN

Auto Login

Auto Login User

■

User Regist.

User Edit

Time

Date

JAN

12 00 00

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

User Regist.

User Edit

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

■

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

■

ADMIN

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

OFF

SETUP

■

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

10s

OFF

n Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

more.

The SETUP MENU will disappear and live image will be dis-

played.

Important:

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after set-

ting the clock.

SHUTDOWN

To shutdown the unit, do the following.

When recording is being performed, press the REC button

for 2 or more seconds. Recording will stop and the indica-

tor on the REC button will go off.

When playback is being performed, press the STOP button.

Playback will stop and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will go off.

Turn off the power of the unit after confirming that the HDD1

and HDD2 indicators are off.

Important:

• Detach the plug from the outlet if not operating the unit

for a length of time.

• When the unit has not been operated for a certain peri-

od, turn on the power of the unit twice a week to pre-

vent interference with functions.

RECORDING (Manual Recording)

Do the following to record manually.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings

for manual recording.

When recording with higher priority than manual recording

is performed, manual recording will not be performed until

this recording finishes.

Refer to the following about the recording mode.

x Stop recording.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

Press the REC button down for around 2 seconds.

The indicator on the button will go off and recording will

stop.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Notes:

• The camera selection button will light orange (currently

recording) or blue (currently being recorded and dis-

played on the monitor) to indicate which camera is

being recorded.

• When recording with other recording modes being per-

formed, the indicator on the REC button will not go off

even though the REC button is pressed to stop manual

recording.

z Start recording.

Press the REC button to start recording.

The indicator on the button will light and recording will start.

Images from all the connected cameras will be recorded

with the default setting.

It is possible to record only images displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor by changing the settings.

● Recording Mode and Priority

There are 4 recording modes as follows.

Recording Mode

Emergency Recording

Event Recording

Manual Recording

Schedule Recording

Description

Priority*1

Start recording manually using an external switch at an emergency event occurrence Highest

Recording will be performed automatically at an event occurrence

Start and stop recording manually

1^*2

2^*2

3^*2

Recording will be performed automatically with a designated start/stop time and date

*1: Priorities on the above table are the default settings. (Emergency recording is the highest priority.)

*2: Priorities for manual recording, schedule recording and event recording can be changed. Refer to a system administrator

about the settings.

● Recording Time

Approximate possible recording durations will be as follows (with built-in HDD, manual recording):

Recording with audio

Unit: Hour

EXA

NQA

(Standard)

1 730

570

FQA

(High Quality)

1 320

440

SFA

Recording Rate [ips]

(For Extended Recording)

(Highest Quality)

2 040

680

1 270

680

1 070

470

950

570

630

440

7.5

350

510

400

200

430

340

170

330

260

130

260

210

100

Recording without audio

Unit: Hour

EXA

NQA

(Standard)

2 860

950

FQA

(High Quality)

1 900

630

SFA

Recording Rate [ips]

(For Extended Recording)

(Highest Quality)

3 810

1 270

950

760

380

120

1 430

470

350

280

140

950

710

570

280

630

470

380

190

7.5

Important:

The possible recording durations on the above tables are approximate durations under the conditions below. The possible

recording durations varies depending on object of shooting. Refer to a system administrator for further information.

• Recording on the built-in hard disk (160 GB x 1)

• Recording all camera channels by manual recording

• "AUTO" is selected for the recording rate

• Resolution: FIELD

• Color Mode: COLOR STD (The color mode setting is available only using a PC via a network.)

RECORDING (Emergency Recording)

Record manually using an external switch at an emergency

event occurrence.

For example, install an external switch at the reception

counter, and start recording with it when a suspicious indi-

vidual appears.

• When starting emergency recording while another

recording with a different recording mode (except event

recording) is being performed, the indicator on the REC

button will remain lit and the other recording will resume

after the emergency recording has finished.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings

for emergency recording.

● Recording duration of emergency

recording

Recording duration of emergency recording can be set as

follows. Refer to a system administrator for further informa-

tion.

Parameter

Recording Duration

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

1 s - 10 s

Record for the selected time (1 - 10 sec-

onds , can be set in 1 second step)

Record for 20 seconds

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

20 s

30 s

10/0

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

Record for 30 seconds

SET

BUSY

1 m - 10 m

Record for the selected time (1 -10 min-

utes can be set in 1 minute intervals)

Record for the selected time (20 - 60 min-

utes, can be set in 10 minutes intervals)

Record only while the external switch is

being pressed down

20 m - 60 m

MANUAL

z Press the external switch.

The indicator on the REC button will light and recording will

start.

CONTINUE

Record until the ALARM RESET button is

pressed

With the default setting, recording will be performed for 10

seconds.

Emergency recording is the highest priority. Emergency

recording will be performed even when this unit is record-

ing in other recording modes.

x Stop recording.

When the recording duration set in advance has passed,

recording will stop automatically.

With the default setting, recording will stop automatically

after recording for 10 seconds.

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Recording Time" of

"Emergency REC" on the SETUP MENU (Recording), press

the ALARM RESET button to stop recording.

The indicator on the REC button will go off and recording

will stop.

Important:

• The camera selection button will light orange (currently

recording) or blue (currently being recorded and dis-

played on the monitor) to indicate which camera is

being recorded.

PLAYBACK

It is possible to play recorded images without stopping

recording.

The playback images will be displayed on monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor.

x Start playback.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and the

recorded images of the selected camera will be played.

[WJ-HD316]

First playback after login: The latest recorded image will

be played.

c x

With the default setting, playback will start 5 seconds

before the start time of the latest recorded image. The

start time can be selected from the following:

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 m/5 m

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

Refer to a system administrator about the settings.

Other than those above: Playback will start from the end

[WJ-HD309]

point of the recorded image played last time.

c x

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

c Stop playback.

Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

z Select a camera respective to the recorded

images to be played. (Go to step 2 if not neces-

sary)

Press the desired camera selection button.

The pressed camera selection button will light green or

blue and the respective live images will be displayed.

● Available functions during playback

Pause

Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button to pause playback. While pausing,

the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will blink.

PLAY

PAUSE

Pressing this button again will resume playback.

Single frame skip

Rotating the jog dial during pause will skip to the next or previous

frame.

REV

FWD

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the next frame and rotating

it counterclockwise will skip to the previous frame.

–

Fast forward/Fast reverse

Hold playback speed

Skip

Rotating the shuttle ring will change the playback speed (1/2x, 1x, 2x,

5x, 10x, 20x) according to rotated degree. When the shuttle ring is

held in the 20x position (rotated to the end) for 5 seconds, the play-

back speed will be 50x. When the shuttle ring is held 5 more seconds

after the playback speed became 50x, the playback speed will be

100x.

Rotating the shuttle ring clockwise will play at a faster speed and

rotating it counterclockwise will play images in reverse at a faster

speed.

REV

FWD

–

To play at normal speed, release the shuttle ring.

Press the SET button while holding the rotated shuttle ring to hold a

desired playback speed. (Playback speed will be held even though

the shuttle ring is released.)

REV

FWD

–

To return to the normal playback speed, press the SET button.

SET

Rotating the jog dial during playback will skip to the next or previous

recorded image.

REV

FWD

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the start time of the next

recording and start playback, and rotating it counterclockwise will

skip to the start time of the previous one. (Rotating the jog dial coun-

terclockwise at the point around the start time of the recording will

skip to the start time of two more previous recording).

If there is no next or previous recorded image, current playback will

continue.

–

Play the latest recorded image

Multi-screen display

Press the GO TO LAST button to play the latest recorded image.

PAN/

GOTO

LAST

TILT

It is possible to display recorded images in multi-screen format

(4/7/9/10/13/16 for the WJ-HD316, 4/7/9 for the WJ-HD309).

q Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

w Press a camera selection button (1 - 6 for the WJ-HD316, 1 - 3 for

the WJ-HD309) to select a desired multi-screen.

Camera selection button 1: 4-split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7-split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9-split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316)

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD316)

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD309)

Camera selection button 5: 10-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316)

Camera selection button 6: 13-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316)

e To display recorded images on a single screen, press the SHIFT

button again.

After the SHIFT indicator goes off, press the camera selection but-

ton.

Marking

It is possible to play from a marked point. Do the following to mark a

desired point.

Mark

1. Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

2. Press the camera selection button 12 (9 for the WJ-HD309) (MARK)

at a desired point to be marked during playback.

Up to 100 points can be marked. When more than 100 points are

marked, the old marked point will be overwritten by new marked

point. In this case, the oldest marked point is the first to be overwrit-

ten.

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD316)

(For the WJ-HD309)

When marked while displaying in multi-screen, the same number of

split screens will be counted as marked points. (When a point is

marked while displaying a 16-split screen, 16 points will be marked

simultaneously.)

Text display

It is possible to display text information attached to recorded image

while playback.

Text display is available only when playing on a single screen.

q Pause playback.

w Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

e Press the camera selection button 11 (5 for the WJ-HD309) (TEXT).

TEXT

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD316)

(For the WJ-HD309)

A - B repeat playback

It is possible to play recorded images between two designated points

repeatedly.

q Designate a start point (A) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button

during playback.

A-B

REPEAT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

The A - B REPEAT indicator will light, and the time of point A will

be displayed.

Blink: During the A-B repeat playback

Light: When designating a start point (A)

Time of point A

To cancel the designated point, press the SETUP/ESC button.

w Designate an end point (B) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button

during playback.

When the start point and the end point are set, the A - B REPEAT

indicator will start blinking.

Playback between point A and B will start and keep playing

repeatedly.

The time of point A and B will be displayed during playback.

Time of point A and B

e Press the A - B REPEAT button during A - B repeat playback to

return to normal playback.

Note: Playback will be paused if the playback time caught up with

the recording time (present time) when recording and play-

back are performed simultaneously.

PLAYBACK IMAGE ON A DESIGNATED DISK

Images from a camera will be recorded on the built-in hard

disk or external recording devices (DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R

[WJ-HD316]

drive or CD-R drive) connected to this unit.

Available disk space or disks are as follows.

Note: External recording devices can be used as a copy

area for images recorded on the hard disk. It is impos-

sible to record images on the external recording

devices directly.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

HDD Normal Recording Area/Event Recording Area:

Disk space for recording on the built-in hard disk

Recorded images by manual recording (refer to page

19) or event recording will be stored in this area.

[WJ-HD309]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

HDD Copy Area: Disk space for recording on the built-in

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

hard disk

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

Recorded images will be copied in this area (refer to

page 48).

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

Built-in hard disk

Recording area for

manual recording and

normal schedule

z Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

recording

Normal recording area

x Press the camera selection button 9 (7 for the

Recording area for

event recording and

WJ-HD309) (DISK SELECT).

emergency recording

The DISK SELECT window will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

Event recording area

Recording area for

copying

DISK SELECT

Copy area

HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA

HDD COPY AREA

CANCEL

Notes:

• Playback images will be displayed only on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

• Playback can be performed during recording.

• Disk space size of each recording area differs depend-

ing on the settings.

Refer to a system administrator for further information.

n To stop playback, press the STOP button.

n b

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will stop.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

Note: Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button after stopping play-

back will start playback from the end point of the

recorded image played last time.

BUSY

c cv cv

c Move the cursor to select a disk to be played

using the arrow buttons and rotate the jog dial

to check the radio button next to the selected

disk. Press the SET button to determine the

selection.

DISK SELECT

HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA

HDD COPY AREA

CANCEL

The recording event list window will be displayed. (Refer to

page 28 for further information.)

To close the DISK SELECT window, move the cursor to

select "CANCEL" and press the SET button.

v Rotate the jog dial to select a desired recorded

image to be played, and press the SET button

to determine the selection.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

b Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to play the

selected recorded image.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and play-

back will start.

PLAYBACK FROM A DESIGNATED TIME AND DATE

It is possible to play recorded images from a designated

c Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and start

playback from the entered time and date.

time and date without stopping recording.

Playback images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

If there is no recorded image after the entered time:

When there are images recorded after the entered time, the

oldest recorded image after the entered time will be played.

When there are no images recorded after the entered time,

the newest recorded image before the entered time will be

played.

v c

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

v Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

stop playback.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

z Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

time and date designation window is dis-

played.

The time and date designation window will be displayed on

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

START

JAN

00 AM

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

x Enter the start time using the jog dial and the

arrows button.

Select time and date using the jog dial. To move the cursor,

use the arrows button (AB).

START

FEB

00 AM

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

SEARCH AND PLAY

There are 3 ways to search for a recorded image and play it.

• Search for a recording event and play it (Recording event search)

• Search for a motion detected time and date from recorded images and play it (VMD search)

• Search for a marked point and play it (Marking search)

Note: Playback images will be displayed on a single screen on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. To play in a multi-screen,

switch to a multi-screen after starting playback.

■ Searching For a Recording Event and Playback (Recording Event

Search)

Display a list or a thumbnail of recording events, and select the desired recording event from them to play it.

It is possible to search using the following filters:

Searching Filters

TIME & DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

Search for only images recorded in the entered time range.

Search for only recorded images from the selected camera channel.

Search for only images recorded in the selected recording mode.

It is possible to search for images recorded in the following recording modes:

EMERGENCY: Emergency recording (Refer to page 21.)

VMD:

TERMINAL:

Event recording performed when motion had been detected (Refer to page 32.)

Event recording performed when a terminal alarm had been detected.

COMMAND: Event recording performed when a command alarm had been detected.

VIDEO LOSS: Event recording performed when video loss had occurred.

MANUAL:

Manual recording (Refer to page 19.)

SCHEDULE: Schedule recording (Refer to page 104.)

Search for only images recorded with text information

TEXT

● Recording Event List Window

Searching filter buttons

Filter cancel button

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

Recording event

Text information

Camera Channel

Time and date

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

100

Time range of listed data

Number of listed data

Searching information

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Searching filter buttons:

Filter cancel button:

Time and date:

Selects the searching filter

Cancels the selected searching filter and lists all recording events

Time when recording started will be displayed.

Time when motion had been detected will be displayed.

Time when the point was marked will be displayed.

Camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of the

displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen.

Recording mode will be displayed.

First several characters of text information will be displayed if the image has text infor-

mation.

Camera channel:

Recording event:

Text information:

Time range of the listed data:

Number of the listed data:

Searching information:

Time range of the listed data will be displayed.

Number of the listed data will be displayed.

Searching filter will be displayed. (A filter of the currently displayed list will be displayed

in orange.)

● Recording Event Thumbnail Window

Time and date

Camera channel/Recording event

Number of listed data

Time and date:

Time when recording started will be displayed.

Time when motion had been detected will be displayed.

Time when the point was marked will be displayed.

Camera channel/Recording event: Camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of the

displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen. Recording mode also will

be displayed.

Number of the listed data:

Number of the listed data will be displayed.

Note: Some images displayed in the thumbnail window may not match with respective displayed recorded time.

x Use the arrows button (AB) to select a

searching filter (TIME & DATE, CAMERA,

EVENT, TEXT), and press the SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

BUSY

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

z z

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

z Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

recording event list window is displayed.

When a searching filter is selected, the respective search-

ing filter window will be displayed.

Select "UNLOCK FILTER" and press the SET button to can-

cel the selected filter.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

Refer to page 28 about the searching filters.

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

The recording event list window will be displayed on moni-

tor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch displaying the list

window and the thumbnail window alternately.

To search using a searching filter, go to step 4.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Filter recording events by recording event

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REC EVENT FILTERING

EMERGENCY OFF

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

VMD

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

TERMINAL ON

COMMAND ON

VIDEO LOSS ON

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

MANUAL

SCHEDULE

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

Move the cursor to select the recording event (refer to page

28) using the arrows button (CD) and rotate the jog dial to

ON.

c Filter recording events.

Filter recording events by time and date

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording events of the selected filter will be listed.

TIME&DATE FILTERING

■

START

Filter recording events by text information

JAN

END

TEXT FILTERING

WITHOUT TEXT

JAN

SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

Move the cursor using the arrows button and rotate the jog

dial to enter time and date.

Press the SET button to determine the entered time and

date.

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

The recording event in the entered time range will be listed

and displayed.

Rotate the jog dial to select OFF, WITH TEXT or WITHOUT

TEXT.

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording events filtered by the selected filter will be

listed.

Filter recording events by camera channel

CAMERA FILTERING

CAMERA

v Rotate the jog dial to select a recording event

to be played.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

Select camera channel numbers (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316,

1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309) using the arrows button to apply fil-

tering.

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM TOTAL

12345

The selected camera channels will turn to white.

Press the SET button to determine the selection of camera

channel numbers.

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

The recording events of the selected camera channels will

be listed.

b Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and playback of the selected recording

event will start.

Note: When operating the system controller, select a cam-

era channel using the numeric keypad. In this case, it is

impossible to select 10 CH to 16 CH.

Note: When the LISTED indicator is lit, only listed recording

events are available to be played. Press the LISTED

button during playback to make all recording events

available to be played.

z Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

VMD search list is displayed.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

VMD SEARCH

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

TIME&DATE

CAM

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

n To stop playback, press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

The result list of the VMD search will be displayed on moni-

tor 2 and the VGA monitor.

(The list in the displayed window is of the results of the pre-

vious search.)

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying

Important:

the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

In the recording event list, start time of recording will be

displayed.

When events occurred successively, contents of the

event log and the recording event list will not always

match since the unit continues to record the first

occurred event.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

■ Searching for a motion detected

time and date from recorded

images and play it (VMD search)

Search for a motion detected time and date from all images

recorded in all the recording modes, and display a list or a

thumbnail of the results.

Select a time and date displayed on the result list or thumb-

nail to play it.

It is possible to filter by camera channel, time and date,

detection area or searching mode, to list time and date of

events that were recorded when motion was detected.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

The motion detection area setup window will be displayed.

To search using the same conditions as the previous

search, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Go to step 12 when the VMD search is performed and a list

of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button is

pressed.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Note: If no image had been recorded in the time range set

in step 3, the motion detection area setup window will

not be displayed when the SET button is pressed.

cn xvn cb

x Press the SET button.

b Rotate the jog dial to select "SETUP AREA" on

the status bar.

SELECT CAMERA & DATE

■

CAMERA

CAM1

START

JAN

END

JAN

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

The VMD search window will be displayed.

Enter a camera channel number and time range on the

VMD search window for the VMD search.

To search using the same conditions as the previous

search, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Note: It is possible to set all displayed areas as motion

detection areas by pressing the SET button after select-

ing "ALL AREAS".

Go to step 12 when the VMD search is performed and a list

of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button is

pressed.

n Move the cross cursor using the arrows button

to a point to be determined as the start point of

the motion detection area.

c Move the cursor using the arrows button and

rotate the jog dial to enter a camera channel

number and time range for the VMD search.

SELECT CAMERA & DATE

■

CAMERA

CAM1

START

JAN

END

JAN

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the

start point of the motion detection area.

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

v Press the SET button.

⁄ Select the sensitivity using the arrows button

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

(DC) from the following.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

OFF: Motion will not be detected

LOW: Low sensitivity

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

MID: Standard sensitivity

HIGH: High sensitivity

SET

BUSY

m.⁄ m⁄ ,⁄

⁄ Rotate the jog dial to select "EXIT" on the sta-

tus bar to exit from the motion detection area

setup window.

m Move the cross cursor using the arrows button

to a point to be determined as the end point of

the motion detection area.

⁄ Press the SET button to display the VMD

search window.

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the

end point of the motion detection area.

It is possible to set up to 4 motion detection areas by

repeating step 6 and 7.

VMD SEARCH

■

ANY AREA

MASKING DURATION

24h

VECTOR

20s

DURATION

20s

, Rotate the jog dial to select "SENSITIVITY" on

the status bar.

20s

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

Refer to page 36 for further information about each of the

detection modes.

Note: Depending on the position of the set detection areas,

the sensitivity indications of the detection areas may be

displayed overlapping each other.

. Move the cross cursor to the motion detection

area to apply the sensitivity using the arrow

button (AB).

⁄ Press the SET button or the PLAY/PAUSE but-

ton to start searching and display the results

of the VMD search.

⁄ ⁄⁄

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

VMD SEARCH

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

TIME&DATE

CAM

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

SET

BUSY

⁄

⁄⁄ ⁄⁄

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

⁄ Move the cursor to select a detection mode

using the arrow buttons and rotate the jog dial

to check the radio button next to the selected

detection mode. Press the SET button to deter-

mine the selection.

Up to 200 results will be displayed. (When 200 results are

listed, searching will stop.)

⁄ Rotate the jog dial to select a result to be dis-

VMD SEARCH

■

played.

ANY AREA

MASKING DURATION

24h

VECTOR

VMD SEARCH

20s

DURATION

20s

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

20s

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

Refer to page 36 for further information about each of the

detection modes.

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

⁄ Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start play-

Move the cursor to the parameter box using the arrows but-

ton (B) to select a masking duration from the following.

1S/1M/1H/24H

back.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and playback of the selected recording will

start.

Note: It is possible to skip the playback point to the listed

time (motion detected time) by rotating the jog dial

when the LISTED indicator is lit.

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR

using the arrows button (B) and rotate the jog dial to select

an area. Move the cursor to the parameter box of the

selected area using the arrows button (B) to select an

interval time for an object moving between each area from

the following.

To return to normal playback, press the LISTED button.

⁄ Press the STOP button to stop playback.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Move the cursor to the parameter box of each area using

the arrows button (B) and rotate the jog dial to select a

moving duration for an object in each area from the follow-

ing.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D

areas.

■ To delete the motion detection

area

Note: In the ANY AREA mode, it is possible to set the

masking duration. When the masking duration is set,

motion will be ignored for a certain period (set duration

as the masking duration) in the same area. It is conve-

nient to set the masking duration to make the subject

period shorter in case it is necessary to search an

extended time range or searching through many

results.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

It will be subject to be listed if an object moves within the

set time to the other detection areas in the set order.

The following is an example.

z Rotate the jog dial to select "DELETE AREA"

on the status bar.

10 s

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after being

detected in area A.

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after being

detected in area B.

Note: To delete all the motion detection areas, select

"DELETE ALL AREA" and press the SET button.

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after being

detected in area C.

When all of the above have occurred, an event action will

be performed.

x Move the cursor to the motion detection area

to be deleted using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

The selected area will be deleted.

It will be subject to be listed if an object keeps moving for

the set period in the detection area. For example, in case of

the following settings; 10 sec. for areas A and B, 20 sec. for

area C and 30 sec. for area D:

An event action will be performed when an object keeps

moving more than the set period in the specified detection

area.

● Detection Mode

Set how to detect motion in the set motion detection area.

There are 3 detection modes as follows:

Important:

It is impossible to set two or more detection modes

simultaneously.

It will be subject to be listed if "motion" is detected in any of

the set motion detection areas.

Important:

• When images to be searched are recorded with low

recording rate, the DURATION mode may not work cor-

rectly.

• It may take time to search according to the contents of

the recorded images.

To delete all displayed marking list, press the camera

selection buttons [1] and [2] simultaneously for 2 seconds

or more when displaying the marking list window.

■ Searching for a marked point

and play from that point

(Marking search)

Display the recording time of recorded images with a

marked point in a list or a thumbnail and select the desired

recording time to play. Refer to page 24 for further informa-

tion about marking.

x Rotate the jog dial to select a desired marked

time.

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

v c z

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

c Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light, and playback a recorded image from the

selected marked time will start.

z Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

Notes:

marking list window is displayed.

• It is possible to skip the playback point to the listed time

(marked time) by rotating the jog dial when the LISTED

indicator is lit.

To return to normal playback, press the LISTED button.

• It is possible some recorded images with marked points

may have been deleted by overwrite recording or the

delete function.

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

v Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

The result list of the marking search will be displayed on

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying

the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

MONITOR LIVE IMAGES

It is possible to display live images on a single screen or a

multi-screen.

■ Electronic Zoom

When displaying a single screen, zooming in on the dis-

played image is possible.

Electronic zoom is available only on the selected monitor.

When the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 indicator is lit (the moni-

tor 1 is selected), electronic zoom works only on monitor 1.

On a single sequential display (It is also possible that dis-

played images from cameras will be switched automatical-

ly)

■ Displaying Live Images on a

[WJ-HD316]

Single Screen

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

[WJ-HD316]

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

REV

FWD

PRESET

/AUTO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SET

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

BUSY

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

z x

SET

BUSY

[WJ-HD309]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

[WJ-HD309]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

MARK

LOGOUT

REV

FWD

IRIS

LISTED

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

PRESET

/AUTO

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SET

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

BUSY

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

z Press the SHIFT button when monitoring live

images on a single screen.

z Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to

The SHIFT indicator will light.

select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected, the indica-

tor will not light.

x Press the EL-ZOOM button to enlarge the dis-

played image.

The displayed image will be displayed with x2 zoomed

size.

x Press a camera selection button

(1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316, 1 - 9 for the WJ-

HD309) to select a camera.

Zooming level will change each time the EL-ZOOM button

is pressed.

x2 → x4 → OFF

Live images from the selected camera will be displayed

and the respective camera selection button will light green

or blue.

When monitor 2 is selected, live images will be displayed

on the VGA monitor.

Notes:

• When an image is zoomed in on (x2 or x4), it is possible

to move the zoomed image using the arrows button.

• When any indicator of PAN/TILT, ZOOM/FOCUS, IRIS,

PRESET/AUTO is lit, it is impossible to use the EL-

ZOOM function.

The camera selection buttons respective to live images dis-

played on a multi-screen will light green or blue.

■ Displaying on a Multi-screen

It is possible to display images on a multi-screen (4, 7, 9,

10, 13, 16 for the WJ-HD316, 4, 7, 9 for the WJ-HD309).

[WJ-HD316]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

When monitor 2 is selected in step 1, live images will also

be displayed on the selected multi-screen on the VGA mon-

itor.

SET

BUSY

To display on a single screen

[WJ-HD309]

Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will go off.

Press any of the camera selection buttons.

Live images will be displayed on a single screen.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

When displaying on a 4-split screen

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

Each time the camera selection button 4 is pressed, dis-

played camera channels will be changed as follows:

WJ-HD316: 1-4 CH – 5-8 CH – 9-12 CH – 13-16 CH

WJ-HD309: 1-4 CH – 5-8 CH – 9 CH

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

When displaying on a 9-split screen

Each time the camera selection button 9 is pressed, dis-

played camera channels will be changed as follows:

Only for the WJ-HD316: 1-9 CH – 10-16 CH

z Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to

select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

x Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

c Press a camera selection button 1 - 6 (1 - 3 for

the WJ-HD309) to select a desired multi-

screen.

Camera selection button 1: 4-split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7-split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9-split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316)

Camera selection button 5: 10-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316)

Camera selection button 6: 13-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316)

■ Sequential Display

Displayed images from cameras will be switched automati-

cally.

Camera images will be displayed sequentially according to

the settings performed in advance.

[WJ-HD316]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

[WJ-HD309]

z c

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

z Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to

select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

x Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

c Press the SEQ button.

The camera selection button respective to the displayed

image will light green.

To stop sequential display, press the SEQ button.

When trying to display on a single screen or multi-screen

during the sequential display, the sequential display will be

stopped.

When monitor 2 is selected in step 1, the sequential display

will also start on the VGA monitor.

CONTROL CAMERAS

When displaying live images, the following camera controls

are possible.

• Panning/tilting: Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

■ Zoom

Zooms in/out on images. Depending on models of the con-

nected cameras, the image size for the respective zooming

level may be different. For further information, refer to the

operating instruction for the camera.

• Zooming:

• Focus:

Zooms in/out on images.

Adjusts the focus.

• Iris:

• Preset action:

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

Moves a camera to the preset position

registered in advance.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

• Auto function:

Moves a camera with an auto function

set in advance.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

Notes:

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

• Controlling cameras is possible only when displaying

images on a single screen.

• Depending on models of the connected cameras, it

may be impossible to control the camera or some func-

tions may not be available.

• Refer to page 126 for descriptions of how to display

and perform the settings with the settings menu of the

camera from this unit.

z Press the ZOOM/FOCUS button.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

x Use the arrows button (CD) to zoom in on or

out of the displayed image.

■ Panning/Tilting

Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

Press the arrows button downward (C) to zoom out and

upward (D) to zoom in.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

■ Focus

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

Adjusts the focus. The auto focus function is available.

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

z Press the PAN/TILT button.

The PAN/TILT indicator will light.

SET

BUSY

x x

x Use the arrows button to adjust the vertical or

horizontal position.

z Press the FOCUS button.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

Camera will move slowly by pressing the arrows button

while holding the SLOW button down.

x Use the arrows button (AB) to adjust the

focus.

Auto focus is available by pressing the SET button.

■ Iris

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

■ Preset Action

Moves a camera to the preset position registered in

advance.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

Important:

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

• When using a camera of the WV-CS650 (WV-CSR650)

series or the WV-CS600 (WV-CSR600) series, register

preset positions using the settings menu of the camera.

• When the monitor 1 is selected, it is impossible to regis-

ter preset positions and move a camera to a preset

position by performing the following steps.

In this case, perform the settings using the setup menu

of camera.

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

x x

z Press the IRIS button.

The IRIS indicator will light.

● Register Preset Positions of Cameras

Up to 64 preset positions can be registered.

x Use the arrows button (AB) to adjust the iris.

[WJ-HD316]

To reset the set iris, press the SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

[WJ-HD309]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

z Press the PAN/TILT button and move the cam-

era to a desired position to be registered as a

preset position.

x Press the SET button. The REGISTRATION

PRESET POSITION window will be displayed.

REGISTRATION PRESET POSITION

PRESET NUMBER

CANCEL

[WJ-HD316]

■ Move a camera to the preset

position

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

[WJ-HD316]

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SET

REV

FWD

BUSY

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

v v

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

[WJ-HD309]

BUSY

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

[WJ-HD309]

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SET

REV

FWD

BUSY

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

v v

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

c Press a camera selection button

([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for

the WJ-HD309) to register a preset position

number.

The pressed button number will be registered as a preset

position number.

The jog dial also can be used to select a preset position

number by rotating it.

z Press the PRESET/AUTO button.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

Up to 64 can be registered as a preset position number.

x Press a camera selection button

([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for

the WJ-HD309) to select a desired preset posi-

tion.

v Select "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

The adjusted camera position (currently displayed on the

monitor) will be registered as a preset position with the

selected preset position number.

To cancel the selected preset position, select "CANCEL"

using the arrows button and press the SET button. The set-

ting will be canceled and the REGISTRATION PRESET

POSITION window will be closed.

Pressing the camera selection button [10/0] ([0] for the WJ-

HD309) moves a camera to the home position.

The jog dial can also be used to select a preset position

number by rotating it.

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

PRESET NUMBER

AUTO PAN

CANCEL

c Select "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and the

camera will move to the selected preset position.

When selecting "CANCEL" using the arrows button and

press the SET button, the PRESET/AUTO PAN window will

be closed.

Note: To move the camera to another registered preset

position, press the SET button after selecting a desired

preset position number in step 2. The PRESET/AUTO

PAN window will not close and it is possible to select

another preset number.

■ Auto Function (Auto Pan, etc)

Moves a camera with an auto function set in advance.

Important:

When the monitor 1 is selected, it is impossible to move

a camera with an auto function by performing the fol-

lowing steps.

In this case, perform the settings using the setup menu

of camera.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

z Press the PRESET/AUTO button.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

x Move the cursor to "AUTO PAN" using the

arrows button and check the radio button next

to "AUTO PAN" using the jog dial.

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

PRESET NUMBER

AUTO PAN

CANCEL

c Select "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and auto

function will start.

During auto action, it is impossible to register a preset posi-

tion. To close the PRESET/AUTO PAN window, select "CAN-

CEL" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The setting will be canceled and the PRESET/AUTO PAN

window will be closed.

ABOUT THE EVENT FUNCTION

The event action will be performed when the following

events occur.

• Motion detection: When motion is detected by the

motion detection function (see below), this is stated as

an event of motion detection.

● Activity Detection Mode (ACT DET)

This mode records images in the place where an event

occurred without announcing it.

• Video Loss: When a video signal supply is stopped

because of a cable disconnection or malfunction of a

camera, this is stated as an event of video loss.

• Terminal alarm: When a signal is supplied from an

external device such as a door sensor to the ALARM

terminal, this is stated as an event of the terminal alarm.

• Command alarm: When a command alarm is supplied

from a PC connected to the SERIAL connector on the

rear panel of this unit, this is stated as an event of the

command alarm.

Activity Detection

Event Action

Start recording

Alarm Mode

Mode

✓

Displays event information

on the monitor.

–

✓

Blinks the alarm indicator.

Sounds the buzzer.

–

Switches from a displayed

image to the image from the

location of the alarm occur-

rence.

✓

–

About the Motion Detection Function (VMD)

An alarm signal will be supplied when motion (luminance

transition) is detected in a designated area. It is possible to

save images recorded in the place where motion is detect-

ed, or send e-mails when motion is detected.

Refer to a system administrator for further information about

the required settings for the motion detection function such

as the settings of the detection area.

* Moves a camera to the

preset position.

✓

* Announces an event

occurrence by sending e-

mails.

–

* Announces an event

occurrence by the

PS·Data/Serial (RS232C)

commands.

✓

–

Supplies a signal from the

ALARM connector or the

ALARM/CONTROL connec-

tor on the rear panel of this

unit (Alarm signal output).

■ Action at an event occurrence

The event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when an event occurs.

✓

Records the event log.

There are 2 event action modes for the alarm mode

(ALARM) and the activity detection mode (ACT DET) for

each event type. The event action will be different accord-

ing to the event action mode set.

When an event of the alarm mode (ALARM) occurs, this unit

activates the alarm action.

* Transmits images to an

FTP server

–

✓ : Applicable

– : Not applicable

* : Available only when using a PC via a network (Refer to

the Network Setup Instructions (PDF) for further informa-

tion.)

About the event action mode

● Alarm Mode (ALARM)

This mode announces an event occurrence outside. Action

taken in the alarm mode is referred to as the alarm action.

● Displays the event information in the alarm

display area on monitor 1 and the camera

title display area on monitor 2

■ Alarm Function

● Blinks the ALARM indicator on the front

panel

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

ALARM

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

OPERATE

● Switches from the images displayed on

monitor 1 and monitor 2 to the images from

the location of the alarm occurrence (on a

single screen)

● Sounds the buzzer

Contact a system administrator about sounding duration.

● Announces an event occurrence to the con-

nected system device (Alarm Output)

Sends

signal to the device connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector, and the connected device

such as a buzzer will be activated.

● Starts recording automatically

Starts recording the image from the location of the event

occurrence automatically.

● Moves a camera to the preset position

A camera will move to the preset position registered in

advance.

● Announces an event occurrence by sending

e-mails

E-mails will be sent to addresses registered in advance.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) on the

provided CD-ROM.

■ Cancel the Alarm Action

■ Suspend the Alarm Actions

It is possible to suspend (deactivate temporarily) the alarm

When an alarm has occurred, this unit will start the alarm

action according to the selected alarm action mode.

To cancel the alarm action, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

When "ON" is selected for "Alarm Auto Reset" (on the "Alarm

Setup" menu of "Event"), the following will be performed

automatically even if the alarm action is not canceled by

pressing the ALARM RESET button on the front panel.

actions even when an event has occurred.

This function will be useful when it is necessary not to acti-

vate the alarm actions for a certain period, such as when

configuring the system. However, images and event logs

will be recorded even when alarm actions are suspended.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

TIMER

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

• The ALARM indicator will stop blinking and light steadi-

ERROR

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

• The displayed alarm information will disappear

• The buzzer will stop beeping

LISTED

10/0

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

STOP

PLAY

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

SEA

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

BUSY

● To suspend (deactivate temporarily)

the alarm actions

z Press both the ALARM RESET button and the

SET button at the same time.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will light.

z Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the

alarm actions.

The ALARM indicator will go off.

● To stop suspending the alarm

actions

x Press both the ALARM RESET button and the

SET button at the same time again.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will go off.

Note: When an external switch is connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel, it is

possible to suspend the alarm actions using the exter-

nal switch.

In this case, the alarm actions will be suspended when

the external switch is on.

To stop suspending the alarm actions, set the external

switch to off.

COPYING (Duplicate)

It is available to copy (duplicate) manually the recorded

images in the copy area of the built-in hard disk to the

external recording device (DVD-RAM disk, DVD-R disk,

CD-R disk) connected to the unit.

It is recommended to make back-up copies on a regular

basis for unexpected situations such as malfunction of the

hard disk.

Manual copy is available during the following.

• While displaying live images

• While pausing playback of recorded images

• When displaying a searching window (Recording event

list window, VMD search list window, Marking list win-

dow)

z Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

To copy recorded images during playback, pause the play-

back temporarily.

x Press the COPY button.

DATA COPY

CAMERA

PERIOD

JAN

(Manual copy is not available when a thumbnail window

is displayed.)

COPY DRIVE

HDD COPY AREA

COPY 1

COPY 2

CANCEL

Notes:

• The auto copy function is available for copying record-

ed images to the DVD-RAM disk automatically. When

the auto copy function is enabled, manual copy is not

available. Refer to a system administrator for further

information about the auto copy function.

• To copy during playback of recorded images, pause

playback temporarily.

• To copy recorded images on the DVD-RAM disk, for-

matting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required in

advance. Refer to page 52 for the descriptions of how

to format DVD-RAM disks.

The DATA COPY window will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

The DATA COPY window will not be displayed when a

thumbnail window is displayed.

In this case, display a list window using the arrows button

(CD).

c Perform the settings for data copy (camera

channel, time range, the disk on which images

are to be copied). Move the cursor to each set-

ting item using the arrows button and select a

parameter by rotating the jog dial.

[WJ-HD316]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

Note: Time range to be set for "PERIOD" should be 30 min-

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

utes or less to copy images at one try.

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

[WJ-HD309]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

v v

v Select the "OK" button using the arrows button

and press the SET button.

The DATA COPY window will be closed and data copy will

start.

The copy icon will be displayed on the task bar during

copying.

To close the DATA COPY window, select "CANCEL" using

the arrows button and press the SET button. The setting will

be canceled and the DATA COPY window will be closed.

Copy icon

When the selected COPY DRIVE is not found, copying will

not start and the DATA COPY window will not be closed

even when the SET button is pressed after selecting "OK".

Important:

• To eject the disk, do the following during live images

are displayed.

Confirm the SHIFT indicator is lit. Then, press the cam-

era selection button [10/0] and [1] ([0] and [1] for the

WJ-HD309) simultaneously for 2 seconds or more.

Confirm the SHIFT indicator is lit. Then, press the cam-

era selection button [10/0] and [2] ([0] and [2] for the

WJ-HD309) simultaneously for 2 seconds or more.

• Copying will be performed in the following order:

Viewer Software → Images → Audio

Depending on the set time range for "PERIOD", some of

images and audio may not be copied.

DELETE DATA ON THE DISK

Perform the settings for the built-in hard disk of the unit, the

optional extension unit and the DVD-RAM disk. These are

the descriptions of how to delete recorded images on the

hard disk and how to format a DVD-RAM disk.

Refer to a system administrator for further information about

the other disks.

x Move the cursor to "Maintenance" using the

arrows button (CDAB) and press the SET

button.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

■ Deletion of recorded images

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

saved on the hard disk manually

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Delete recorded images saved in the normal area or the

event area of the built-in hard disk or the optional extension

unit manually.

By setting a time and date, images in the normal record

area of the hard disk recorded before the set time and date

will be deleted.

It is recommended to delete manually when available disk

space is running out.

c Move the cursor to "Data Delete" using the

arrows button (CD).

The "Data Delete" menu will be displayed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Auto Delete

REC Rate

■

OFF

Important:

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

■

DELETE

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Note: It is possible to delete recorded images automatically

when the set days have passed from the day the image

was recorded (Auto Delete). Refer to a system adminis-

trator for further information.

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

v Press the SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

REPEAT

LIVE

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

Auto Delete

REC Rate

■

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

Disk Info

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

SET

BUSY

■

DELETE

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

, Press the SET button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU will be closed and the live images will be

displayed.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

n, b

b Move the cursor to "Manual Delete for Normal

Recording Area" or "Manual Delete for Event

Recording Area" using the arrows button, and

set time and date using the jog dial.

The images recorded the day before the set time and date

will be subject to be deleted.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Auto Delete

REC Rate

■

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

■

DELETE

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

n Move the cursor to "DELETE" using the arrows

button and press the SET button.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Auto Delete

REC Rate

■

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

■

DELETE

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

m Select "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SETUP/ESC button.

Normal recording area is going

to be erased.

CANCEL

To not delete, select "CANCEL".

FORMAT (INITIALIZE) A DVD-RAM DISK

To copy (duplicate) recorded images onto the DVD-RAM

disk, formatting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required

in advance.

To delete images recorded on the DVD-RAM disk, format-

ting (initialization) of the DVD-RAM disk is also required.

c Select "Data Delete" using the arrows button

(CD).

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Auto Delete

REC Rate

■

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Important:

■

DELETE

All data on the disk will be deleted if formatted (initial-

ized). It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

v Press the SET button.

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Auto Delete

REC Rate

■

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

Disk Info

xcb xv

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

■

DELETE

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Event Log

Error Log

z Press the ESC/SETUP button for 2 seconds or

Access Log

more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

b Select either"COPY1" or "COPY2" (port to

which the DVD-RAM is connected) for "Disc

Format of DVD" using the arrows button.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Auto Delete

■

OFF

Event Log

Error Log

REC Rate

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

SUPER FINE

FINE

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

■

DELETE

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

x Select "Maintenance" using the arrows button

and press the SET button.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

n Press the SET button to select "FORMAT".

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

All of data in the COPY1 is going

to be erased.

CANCEL

m Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows but-

ton and press the SET button to start format-

ting.

To stop formatting, select "CANCEL" and press the SET but-

ton.

During formatting, the status window will be displayed.

The status window will be closed automatically after com-

pleting formatting.

, Press the SETUP/ESC button to close the

SETUP MENU window.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

DISPLAY/EDIT TEXT INFORMATION

It is possible to attach text information to images when

recording.

Entering 20 characters for a line (up to 10 lines, with a total

of 200 characters) is possible.

x Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

These are the descriptions of how to display/edit the

attached text information for images.

c Press the TEXT button to display the TEXT

INFORMATION window.

Note: Displaying/editing text information is possible during

the following.

TEXT INFORMATION

• While pausing playback on a single screen

• While displaying the recording event list window

[WJ-HD316]

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

Text information attached to the paused playback image or

text information attached to the selected recording event

will be displayed.

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

To close the TEXT INFORMATION window, press the

SETUP/ESC button or the SET button.

BUSY

[WJ-HD309]

v Press the TEXT button again to edit text infor-

mation.

PLAY

STOP

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

TEXT INFORMATION

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

EXT : [TEXT]

z <While pausing playback on a single screen>

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to stop play-

back.

<While displaying the recording event list win-

dow>

Select a desired recording event by rotating

the jog dial.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Important:

It is impossible to edit text information using the system

controller.

[WJ-HD316]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

[WJ-HD309]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

b Edit text information using the arrows button

and the jog dial.

• To insert a character

Move the cursor to a desired point where a character is

to be inserted using the arrows button, and select a

character using the jog dial.

• To delete a character

Move the cursor to a character to be deleted using the

arrows button, and press the STOP button.

• To delete all characters

Press the STOP button for 2 seconds or more.

• Available characters

The following characters can be entered:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a

b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 12 3 4 5 6

7 8 9!"#$%' ()*+, - ./: ;<=>?@[ \ ] ^ _`{|}~

Press the TEXT button after editing text.

n Press the SET button to apply the edited char-

acters.

TEXT INFORMATION

Digital Disc Recorder WJ-HD316

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

To cancel the edit, press the SETUP/ESC button. The edit-

ed characters will not be applied.

ERROR/WARNINGS

• The "error" status

When a fatal error (one that might cause the system to go down) has occurred, the ERROR indicator will blink red.

• The "warning" status

When an error (even though it has not caused the system trouble yet, but which may become a fatal error) has occurred,

the ERROR indicator will blink orange.

Indication

ALT-*

Status

Description

Solution

Error

Recorded image has been altered.

Playback will be paused.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. Press the

PLAY/PAUSE button to resume play-

back.

R-ERROR

Error

Failed to read data from the HDD.

The HDD may be malfunctioning.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. Contact the dealer

to replace the hard disk.

W-ERROR

SMART

Failed to write data on the HDD.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. Contact the dealer

to replace the hard disk.

Warning

The hard disk may be malfunctioning

and may not work correctly.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. Contact the deal-

er to replace the hard disk.

H-METER

The set time for the HOUR METER has

passed. (Refer to page 93.)

It may be reaching the end of the hard

disk’s lifetime.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. Contact the deal-

er to replace the hard disk.

THERMAL

POWER

Warning

Thermal error of the unit or the optional

extension unit has been detected.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. If thermal errors

occur frequently, the unit may be mal-

functioning. Contact the dealer.

The power outage alert signal is sup-

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

plied from the uninterruptible power sup- cel the warning status. The unit will start

ply system (UPS). Internal processing operation automatically after the UPS

will start when the set time for "Shutdown starts power supply.

Time" on the "Basic Setup" menu of

"System" has passed after having

received the power outage alert signal.

(Refer to page 120.) When the internal

processing starts, recording will stop

and all operations will be invalid.

#-nn% (available

disk space is run-

ning out)

#-FULL (no avail-

able disk space)

Error

Warning

The hard disk is almost full or completely Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

full.

cel the error or the warning status.

Initialize or replace the hard disk. (Refer

to page 127, 132.) When initialized, all

recorded data will be deleted. It is rec-

ommended to copy the data using an

external recording device.

The DVD-RAM disk is almost full or com- Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

pletely full.

cel the error or the warning status.

Initialize the DVD-RAM disk. (Refer to

page 52.) When initialized, all recorded

data will be deleted.

The CD-R or DVD-R disk is almost full or Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

completely full.

cel the error or the warning status.

Replace the disk with new one.

Indication

MEDIUM-n

Status

Warning

Description

Solution

The external recording device is not

operable because no disk or different

format disk has been inserted, etc.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. Confirm that a

disk has been inserted, or check the

inserted disk format.

REMOVE

FAN

Error

An error has occurred on the hard disk

and the hard disk has been unmounted cel the error status. Contact the dealer.

from the system automatically.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

Warning

The fan of this unit or the optional exten- The warning status will be canceled

sion unit is malfunctioning. It may pro-

duce an increase in temperature in the

unit and cause malfunction of the HDDs.

automatically after around 10 minutes of

recovery. Contact the dealer.

* : Camera number

# : Partition number (Refer to page 14.)

nn : Available disk space (percentage)

n : COPY port number to which an external recording device is connected

OPERATION USING A SYSTEM CONTROLLER

It is possible to operate this unit using a PS·Data compatible system controller.

The following are the descriptions of how to operate this unit using the system controller WV-CU360C.

To operate this unit using a PS·Data compatible system controller, perform the required settings in advance. Refer to a system

administrator for further information.

Note: To perform the operation with buttons with the shadowed background ( ), press the SHIFT button of the system con-

troller to light the SHIFT indicator on the right side of the SHIFT button.

Item

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

Note

SETUP

/ESC

Open/Close the SETUP

Press the button [0] to delete a character in the

SETUP MENU.

FUNCTION

Select an item

DOWN

REV

FWD

EL-ZOOM

STILL

–

Rotate

the jog

dial

Change the set para-

meter

–

CAM

Change the cursor

position

SET

CAM

Press a button on the

pop-up menu

SET

MON

SETUP

/ESC

Return to the previous

ESC

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

→

Summer time OFF

Summer time ON

FUNCTION

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

FUNCTION

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

Timer recording OFF

Timer recording EXT

FUNCTION

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the recording

event list

Press the [5] button to display the searching filter

window. Press the SET button to start playback.

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the VMD

search list

Press the [5] button to display the VMD search

list. Press the SET button to start playback.

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the marking list

Press the SET button to start playback.

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the menu for

playback by designat-

ing time and date

→

FUNCTION

Move the cursor to

search for an item

Press Aor B.

DOWN

Switch displaying the

list window and the

thumbnail window

alternately

DOWN

REV

FWD

EL-ZOOM

STILL

–

Display a list/thumbnail

Move the cursor to

select

Rotate

the jog

dial

–

Item

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

Note

MON

SETUP

/ESC

Close the searching

window

Pressing the SETUP button can also close the

searching window.

ESC

ALM RESET

ALARM

RESET

Alarm reset

ALM RECALL

ALM SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

Alarm suspension

Manual recording

Stop manual recording

SET

SETUP

REC

REC STOP

→

FUNCTION

SETUP

Press for 2

seconds or

REC

REC STOP

Available only during recording

FUNCTION

SETUP

STOP

REC

REC STOP

Press for

2 seconds

or more

Stop playback/manual

recording

Both recording and playback will be stopped if

operating the controller as shown on the left.

FUNCTION

SETUP

PLAY

PAUSE

Press the SET button to play the selected result

from the searching window.

Play

FUNCTION

SETUP

STOP

Stop playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

–

During

playback

Play at normal speed

Play at 2x speed

Play at 5x speed

Play at 10x speed

Play at 20x speed

Play at 50x speed

Play at 100x speed

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at normal

speed

–

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 2x

speed

–

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 5x

speed

–

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 10x

speed

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 20x

speed

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 50x

speed

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 100x

speed

During

playback

FUNCTION

Item

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

Note

SETUP

PLAY

PAUSE

→

Pause playback

Available only during playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

Rotate

the jog-

daial

–

Skip to the next frame

Available only during pause

During

pausing

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

Rotate

the jog-

daial

Skip to the previous

frame

–

During

pausing

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

The point to be skipped to will be different

between normal playback and filtered play-

back.

The point to be skipped to will be different

between normal playback and filtered play-

back.

Rotate

the jog-

daial

–

→

Skip forward

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

Rotate

the jog-

daial

–

Skip backward

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

A-B

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Mark start point for the

A - B repeat playback

REPEAT

→

Available only during playback

Available only during the filtered playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

A-B

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Mark end point for the

A - B repeat playback

REPEAT

FUNCTION

SETUP

A-B

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Cancel the A-B repeat

playback

REPEAT

FUNCTION

SETUP

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

Skip to the latest

recorded image

FUNCTION

SETUP

IRIS

LISTED

Filtering off

Filtering on

FUNCTION

SETUP

LISTED

Mark

Available only when it is possible to switch to

the filtered playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

SHIFT

Mark a point

(For the WJ-HD316)

FUNCTION

SETUP

Mark

Mark a point

(For the WJ-HD309)

FUNCTION

Select the normal

recording area/event

recording area of the

HDD (For the WJ-

HD316)

SETUP

DISK SELECT

→

FUNCTION

Select the normal

recording area/event

recording area of the

HDD (For the WJ-

HD309)

SETUP

DISK SELECT

FUNCTION

Select the copy area of

the HDD (For the WJ-

HD316)

SETUP

DISK SELECT

→

FUNCTION

SETUP

Select the copy area of

the HDD (For the WJ-

HD309)

FUNCTION

MON

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

→

Select monitor 1

Select monitor 2

ESC

MON

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

ESC

Item

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

Note

SEQUENCE

SEQ

SHIFT

Sequential display ON

(For the WJ-HD316)

It is possible to stop the sequential display by

pressing a camera selection button.

SEQUENCE

SEQ

SHIFT

Sequential display ON

(For the WJ-HD309)

It is possible to stop the sequential display by

pressing a camera selection button.

CAM

Camera

number

Select a camera

(For the WJ-HD316)

Camera selection but-

tons (1 - 16)

→

SET

CAM

Camera

number

Select a camera

(For the WJ-HD309)

Camera selection but-

tons (1 - 9)

→

SET

MULTI SCREEN SELECT

Switches in the following order each time the

button is pressed

Select a multi-screen

(For the WJ-HD316)

SHIFT

1 - 4 CH → 5 - 8 CH → 9 - 12 CH → 13 - 16 CH

→ 1 - 7 CH → 1 - 9 CH → 10 - 16 CH

→ 1 - 13 CH → 1 - 16 CH

SHIFT

MULTI SCREEN SELECT

Switches in the following order each time the

button is pressed

Select a multi-screen

(For the WJ-HD309)

SHIFT

1 - 4 CH → 5 - 8 CH → 9 CH → 1 - 7 CH

→ 1 - 9 CH

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

A-B

REPEAT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Zooming level changes in this order:

2x → 4x → 1x

Zoom ON/OFF

Text information display

ON (For the WJ-HD316)

It is possible to turn the text information display

off by pressing the ESC button when displaying

text information or when pausing playback.

SETUP

TEXT

SHIFT

→

FUNCTION

SETUP

Text information display

ON (For the WJ-HD309)

It is possible to turn the text information display

off by pressing the ESC button when displaying

text information or when pausing playback.

TEXT

SHIFT

FUNCTION

SETUP

SHIFT

COPY

Display the DATA COPY

menu (For the WJ-HD316)

Available only when displaying live images or a

list, or when pausing playback

→

10/0

FUNCTION

SETUP

COPY

Display the DATA COPY

menu (For the WJ-HD309)

Available only when displaying live images or a

list, or when pausing playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

COPY

Cancel copying

(For the WJ-HD316)

During

copying

10/0

FUNCTION

SETUP

COPY

Cancel copying

(For the WJ-HD309)

During

copying

FUNCTION

SETUP

OSD

SHIFT

Switch displayed informa-

tion (For the WJ-HD316)

FUNCTION

SETUP

SHIFT

Switch displayed informa-

tion (For the WJ-HD309)

FUNCTION

OPERATION USING A PC

It is possible to perform the settings or operate the unit

using a web browser installed on a PC when this unit is

connected to a network.

The available features and the system requirements of a

PC are as follows.

■ System Requirements of a PC

It is recommended to operate this unit using a PC that

meets the following system requirements.

OS:

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) on the

provided CD-ROM.

One of the following operating systems:

Microsoft^®Windows^®2000 Professional SP4

Microsoft^®Windows^®XP Professional or Home Edition

SP1

■ Features

It is possible to operate this unit using a web browser in

much the same way as using the buttons on the front panel

of this unit.

PC:

IBM PC/AT Compatible

CPU:

The following functions are available when using a PC via a

network as well as the functions operable using the buttons

on the front panel of the unit.

Intel Pentium‚ IV 1.4 GHz or faster

Memory:

512 MB or more

● Downloading/transmitting images

Monitor:

It is possible to download (save) the currently displayed

image in the web browser window onto the hard disk of a

PC. By establishing an FTP server, it is possible to transmit

images to a designated FTP server. When an event occurs,

it is possible to transmit images from the camera installed

in the place where the event occurred.

1024 x 768 pixels or more, HIGH color 16 bit or more

Interface:

Built-in network interface card compatible 10/100 Mbps

Recommended web browser:

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5SP2, 6.0 SP1

Other web browsers are not compatible with this unit.

● Event notification function

Important:

When an event occurs, it is possible to send e-mails to

designated addresses to notify of the event occurrence. It

is also possible to send an e-mail with a recorded image of

the place where the event occurred.

The plug-in software must be installed. Install the plug-

in software from the provided CD-ROM.

Refer to "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM for the

descriptions of how to install it.

● Host authentication

It is possible to restrict devices from operating this unit if

their IP addresses are not registered.

INSTALLATION IN THE RACK

1. Remove the rubber legs (6 pcs.) on the bottom of the

unit.

• Use a flat-blade screwdriver and remove the screws.

Remove the rubber legs.

2. Install the rack mounting brackets on both sides of the

unit.

• Using the mounting screws (4 pcs.) for the rack mount-

ing brackets, fix them firmly.

Mounting screws for rack mounting brackets

(accessories)

Rack mounting brackets (accessories)

3. Install the unit in the rack.

• Fix the unit firmly with the rack mounting screws (4

pcs.).

Rack mounting screws

For our rack: Nominal diameter 5 tapping (accessory)

Important:

• The cooling fan inside the unit is perishable and must be replaced periodically.

• Do not block the ventilation openings or slots in the cover to prevent the unit from overheating.

• If the rack is subject to vibration, secure the rear of the unit to the rack using additional mounting brackets (not included).

MANAGEMENT OF USERS/HOSTS

It is necessary in advance to register users and PCs (hosts) who access this unit via a network such as LAN.

Up to 32 users and 8 hosts can be registered.

The following information can be registered as user information and host information.

Item

Description

Note

User name

Name of user who log in this unit. Enter this in

the login window.

Item to be set only for user registration

Host IP address

IP address of a PC that accesses this unit.

Only PCs with registered IP addresses can

access this unit if ON is selected for "Host

Authentication" and OFF is selected for "User

Authentication".

Item to be set only for host registration

Password

Level

Password of user who log in this unit. Enter this Item to be set only for user registration

in the login window.

Level of users or hosts for operable functions.

Refer to page 125 for further information.

Priority

Priority of controllable functions. When two or

more users/hosts performed the same opera-

tion, only a user/host with the highest priority

can perform the operation.

Determine the priority in the following cases:

• A user tries to log in after other user has

already logged in.

• A user tries to control a camera that is being

controlled by other user.

Default screen

Startup display to be displayed on the monitor

1, monitor 2 and the VGA monitor after login.

Camera partitioning

Controllable range for each camera channel.

For the set items above, the unit will work differently depending on whether the unit is operated directly or operated via a net-

work as follows.

● When the unit is operated directly

Operate using the monitor connected with this unit. There are 3 ways to operate this unit as follows:

• Operate using the buttons on the front panel of the unit

• Operate using a PS·Data compatible controller

• Operate using a PC connected to the SERIAL connector (RS232C) on the rear panel of the unit

It is impossible to log in the unit simultaneously by the above ways (except for using the same user name to log in).

When a user tries to log in after other user has already logged in the unit, the unit will work as follows according to the setting

for "Priority" of "System".

Setting for "Priority"

Description

Follow the priority

When a user’s priority is higher than the one of the other user

who has already logged in, this user can log in and other

user who has already logged in will be forced to log out.

When a user’s priority is lower than the one of the other user

who has already logged in, this user cannot log in.

Pre-priority

Post-priority

When other user has already logged in, any user except

administrators cannot log in regardless of priority.

When an administrator logged in, the other user who has

already logged in will be forced to log out.

Any user can log in regardless of priority.

Notes:

• When a user is operating this unit using a PS·Data compatible controller, this user can log in automatically as a PSD user

set for "PSD User" of "System" on the SETUP MENU.

• When a user logged in this unit using a PS·Data compatible controller and didn’t operate the unit for around 2 minutes, this

PSD user will be forced to log out.

• When ON is selected for "Auto Login" of "System", a user who logged in automatically will be forced to log out if this user

didn’t operate the unit for around 30 seconds.

● When the unit is operated using a PC via a network

Operate using a PC via a network. Up to 8 hosts (PCs) can access the unit.

When a host tries to log in after 8 hosts have already logged in the unit, the unit will work as follows according to the setting for

"Priority" of "System".

Setting for "Priority"

Description

Follow the priority

When a host’s priority is higher than the one of the other host

who has already logged in, this host can log in and other

host who has already logged in will be forced to log out.

When a host’s priority is lower than the one of the other host

who has already logged in, this host cannot log in.

Pre-priority

Post-priority

Any host cannot log in regardless of priority.

Any host can log in regardless of priority.

When accessing the unit using a PC via a network, the unit will work as follows according to the setting for "User

Authentication" and "Host Authentication" of "NW Setup 1".

Setting for "User

Authentication"

Setting for "Host

Authentication"

User/Host to log in

Note

OFF

trator.

tered user.

The login window will be dis-

played.

OFF

tered host.

The login window will not be

displayed.

tered host.

The login window will be dis-

played when accessing

User authentication will not

be performed.

using a not registered host.

When the host is not regis-

tered, log in as a registered

user.

OPERATING THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME

Important:

v Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

When connecting an optional extension unit (the WJ-

HDE300 series), turn on the power of the extension unit

before turning the power of this unit on.

more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed.

Adjust the clock of the unit with this menu.

Refer to page 17 for further information about clock adjust-

ment.

z Turn on the POWER switch.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

x Press the SET button during the system check

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

complete window is displayed.

The HDD DISK MENU window will be displayed.

Perform the settings with this menu according to your

needs.

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Refer to page 16 for further information.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

b With the default setting, the unit is ready to

start manual recording. Perform the settings

for recordings or event actions according to

your needs.

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

After completing the settings, press any button to close the

HDD DISK MENU.

The login window will be displayed.

When "ON" is selected for "Auto Login" of "Basic Setup" on

the "System" menu, the login window will not be displayed.

(The default setting is ON.)

c Enter a user name and password.

Live images will be displayed after logging in.

Refer to page 16 for further information about the user

name and password.

Notes:

• With the default setting, the disk space is set as the nor-

mal recording area. Perform the settings for each

recording area according to your needs.

• The default user name and password are as follows:

User name: ADMIN

Password: 12345

• To enhance the security, change the password for an

administrator periodically.

v Move the cursor to "HDD Safety Mode" and

Preparation for maintenance (HDD

replacement, installation, etc.)

rotate the jog dial to select "ON ".

When maintaining (HDD replacement, installation, etc.)

without turning the power of the unit off, carry out the follow-

ing operation after setting the HDD SAFETY MODE to ON.

(The default setting is ON.)

This can be set on the "Disk Info" menu of "Maintenance".

Refer to page 93 for further information.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Rate

Remaining

Normal REC Area 1800GB

Event REC Area 1200GB

Copy Area

Copy 1(Rear)

Copy 2(Front)

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

MAIN

EXT7

EXT6

EXT5

EXT4

EXT3

EXT2

EXT1

Disk Info

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

1000GB

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

Event Log

Error Log

160GB

15000h

3000h

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

■

Access Log

Important:

After completing the installation or the maintenance, set

the HDD SAFETY MODE to OFF.

b Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

Do the following before starting operation when maintaining

(HDD replacement, installation, etc.).

more.

The SETUP MENU will be closed.

The unit will restart automatically and the HDD SAFETY

MODE window will be displayed.

The HDD safety mode will begin.

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on the monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

The camera selection buttons (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316, 1 -

9, 0 for the WJ-HD309) will light green and orange (for 2

seconds each) alternately.

The following window will be displayed after around 30 sec-

onds.

x Select "System" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Start maintenance after this window is displayed.

The procedures are different between the replacement of

the hard disks and the installation of the unit (rack mount-

ing/unmounting).

c Move the cursor to "Disk Info" using the

arrows button (CD) and press the SET but-

ton.

Refer to the following descriptions.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Rate

Remaining

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

MAIN

EXT7

EXT6

EXT5

EXT4

EXT3

EXT2

EXT1

Normal REC Area

Event REC Area

Copy Area

1800GB

Disk Info

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

1200GB

1000GB

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

COPY 1 (Rear)

COPY 2 (Front)

Event Log

Error Log

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

3000h

OFF

■

Access Log

When the system check has been completed, the HDD

SAFETY MODE window (as shown below) will be displayed.

The camera selection buttons on the front panel (1 - 16 for

the WJ-HD316, 1 - 9, 0 for the WJ-HD309) will light green

and orange (for 2 seconds each) alternately.

The "REMOVING" indication will return to the "REMOVE" by

attaching the cable to the front panel. The power will be

supplied to the front panel and the unit will be enabled to

operate with the front panel.

● When replacing the built-in hard disk of the

extension unit

With displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window in step 5,

start replacing the built-in hard disk of the optional exten-

sion unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the extension unit for

the descriptions of how to replace the hard disk.

Move the cursor to OFF using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

● When installing/uninstalling the unit

into/from the rack (rack mounting/unmount-

ing)

With displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window in step 5,

start installing/uninstalling the unit.

The unit will restart automatically and the system check

complete window will be displayed.

When the system check complete window is displayed,

carry out the procedure described on page 66 (start from

z).

Important:

Detach the cable from the front panel after confirming

that "REMOVING" is displayed. Otherwise, it may cause

malfunction.

● When replacing the built-in hard disk of the

unit

Move the cursor to "REMOVE" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

The "REMOVE" indication will change to the "REMOVING".

The power supply to the front panel will be cut and the unit

will be unable to operate with the front panel.

Detach the cable from the front panel and start replacing

the built-in hard disk.

Start from step 2 on page 127 to replace the built-in hard

disk.

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections when the unit is used independently

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used independently.

Important:

• The power plug should be connected last.

• When connecting combination cameras , connect them to the video input connectors 1 - 8 when using the WJ-HD316 or

1 - 6 when using the WJ-HD309 (for coaxial communication).

● Examples of connections

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

Mode switch setting (Factory default)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Microphone

Note: If the DATA and RS485 ports are not

used, the mode switches should be used as

illustrated.

Amplifier

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY 1

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

120 V AC

60 Hz

For Audio Amplifier

•

System cameras

(VIDEO IN 9 - 16)

Combination cameras

(VIDEO IN 1 - 8)

■ Connections with an extension unit

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used together with an optional extension unit.

This unit can be connected with up to seven extension units.

Connect the EXT IN port on the rear panel of the extension unit and the EXT STORAGE port on the rear panel of this unit using

the cable provided with the optional extension unit.

Important:

• Use the cable provided with the optional extension unit.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with each unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connections that may

cause recording failures or an unstable system.

How to fix the cable clamp

Cable Clamp

COPY

10/100BASE-T

EXIT ST

ORA

Fixing screw

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

Cable (attached to the extension unit)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

EXT

OUT

Extension unit (WJ-HDE300)

Cable Clamp

Fixing screw

EXT

OUT

How to fix the cable clamp

■ Connections with DVD-RAM, CD-R, and DVD-R drives

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive.

Connect the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive and the COPY1 port on the rear panel or the COPY2 port inside the

connectors cover on the front panel of this unit using an USB cable (not included).

Important:

• Use an appropriate USB cable compatible with the USB2.0 standard.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with this unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connections that may

cause recording failures or an unstable system.

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

How to fix the cable clamp

USB cable (Locally procured)

Cable Clamp

COPY

10/100BASE-T

EXIT ST

ORA

Fixing screw

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

Rear

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

VIDEO

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Front

USB cable (Locally procured)

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

■ Connections with the VCR

When it is necessary to copy the recorded images to a video tape using a VCR, connect the VCR to the S-VIDEO connector (or

the VIDEO OUT connector) and the AUDIO OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel of this unit as below.

Open the terminal cover.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

VIDEO

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

AUDIO

Ordinary audio cable (with a RCA pin plug)

VCR

VIDEO

S-IN terminal

Note: The same video signal supplied to the MONITOR1 connector and to the MONITOR2 (VGA) connector will be supplied to

the S-VIDEO connector and the VIDEO OUT connector inside the connectors cover.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT connector on the rear panel of this unit will be supplied to the AUDIO

OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel.

■ Connections with PS·Data systems

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the PS·Data devices.

If a connected system controller is PS·Data compatible, it is possible to operate this unit or connected devices using the sys-

tem controller.

Use the RS485 cable provided with the system controller.

Important:

• Terminate both devices on both ends of the connection. Refer to the respective operating instructions for the descriptions

of how to terminate. Termination of this unit can be set with the mode switch on the rear panel. (See below.)

• When connecting a PS·Data compatible device, it is necessary to set each item of "PS·Data Setup" of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU according to the system configuration.

• The PS·Data is our exclusive protocol. Contact dealer about devices that can be connected.

● When this unit is installed between the controller and the system device (when

this unit is used as a receiver)

System Controller

RS485 cable (provided with the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 8: ON)

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

AC IN

OUT

VIDEO

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

● When this unit is connected with the system device (when this unit is used as a

controller)

System Controller

RS485 cable

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 2

(No.8 : OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Mode switch

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

RS485 cable

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

Unit Address : 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

OUT

POWER

ALARM

SET UP

SUSPEND

SET ESC

SUSPEND

ALARM

VIDEO

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: OFF

Unit Address : 2

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 1

■ Cascade connection of multiple units

Up to of four units can be connected.

For the cascade connection, connect the CASCADE IN connector and the CASCADE OUT connector on the rear panel of each

unit as below.

Important:

• When connecting the unit in the cascade connection, set "Cascade" of "PS·Data Setup" in "Comm" on the SETUP MENU to

"ON". (Page 115)

• It is impossible to use this connector when connecting the unit in the cascade connection.

● When no PS·Data compatible device is connected to the system

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 Cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 Cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

● When the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the first unit (when this unit

is used as a receiver)

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

System Controller

RS485 cable

(provided with

the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

(No. 8: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 4

OUT

VIDEO

● When the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the third unit (when this unit

is used as a receiver)

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ESC

ALARM

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

RS485 cable

PS Data Compatible

● When the PS·Data compatible devices are connected to the first and third units

(when this unit is used as a receiver)

PS Data application

System Controller

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 1

RS485 cable

(provided with

the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 4

OUT

VIDEO

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

Coaxial communication unit

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Termination: ON

RS485 cable

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

PS Data Compatible

■ Connection with the RS485 camera

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the RS485 devices.

Up to eight cameras can be connected using a single RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Important:

• Terminate both devices on both ends of the connection. Refer to the respective operating instructions for the descriptions

of how to terminate. Termination of this unit can be set with the mode switch on the rear panel.

• When connecting an RS485 camera, it is necessary to set each item of "RS485 Setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

according to the RS485 settings of the camera. (Refer to page 116.)

• The total length of the RS485 cable from this unit is 1 200 meters at the maximum.

● 1:1 connection

Connect a camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When the RS485 cameras are connected to the CAMERA IN connectors 9 and 13:

Mode switch

(No. 1, No. 4 : ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

PS·DATA

RS-485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXIT STORAGE

OUT

CAMERA

RS485 cable

Combination Camera

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

4-wire communication

2-wire communication

No.2

OFF

RS485 (1)

No.3

No.5

OFF

RS485 (2)

No.6

● Daisy connection

Multiple cameras can be connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When cameras 1 - 4 are connected to one of the RS485 (CAMERA) port and cameras 9 - 12 are connected to the

other RS485 (CAMERA) port.

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Nos. 1,2,3,4,5,6 : ON

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

Unit No. 12 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 9

Termination: Termination: Termination: Termination:

ON OFF OFF OFF

Unit No. 4

Unit No. 3

Unit No. 2

Unit No. 1

Termination: Termination: Termination: Termination:

OFF

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

4-wire communication

2-wire communication

No.2

OFF

RS485 (1)

No.3

No.5

OFF

RS485 (2)

No.6

■ Mode Switch

RS485 interface is used to communicate between this unit and the PS·Data compatible system device. In this case, it is neces-

sary to terminate both devices on both ends of the RS485 connection.

The settings of the mode switch will be different depending on whether this unit is used as a receiver or a controller.

When an RS 485 camera is connected to this unit, it is necessary to terminate both devices on both ends of the connection.

• When connecting this unit with the system controller and

this is installed at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data termination switch 1: ON

RS485 (1) terminating switch

RS485 (1) 2/4-wire changeover

RS485 (2) terminating switch

• When connecting a system device and this unit is installed

at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data terminating switch 2: ON

RS485 (2) 2/4-wire changeover

PS•Data terminating switch 1

PS•Data terminating switch 2

• When connecting RS485 cameras

Set the termination switch of the connected RS485 (CAMERA)

port to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the RS485 (1)

termination switch to ON.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the RS485 (2)

termination switch to ON.

• For 2-wire communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to ON.

• For 4-wire communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to OFF.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to OFF.

■ RS485 Port

Internal block diagram

DATA

TA TB RA RB

Output Input

■ How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM/CONTROL Connector

These terminals are used for emergency recording, auto time adjustment (Auto Adjust Time), taking measures against power

outages (Shutdown Time), and when installing a buzzer, a lamp, or similar alarm device. They are also used to synchronize

with the sequential display changeover.

The terminal pin array and connections are shown below. The con-

nector used should be compatible with the pin configuration.

Pin array

ALARM/CONTOROL

The pin array is different from other disk recorders. Make sure that

the connection is correct referring to the following.

Pin No.

Operation

Alarm signal output at an event occurrence

Remarks

Ch 8 alarm output

Ch 9 alarm output

Ch 10 alarm output

Ch 11 alarm output

Ch 12 alarm output

Ch 13 alarm output

Ch 14 alarm output

Ch 15 alarm output

Ch 16 alarm output

Open collector output

24 V max., 100 mA

Alarm display reset input Canceling the alarm display

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Emergency recording

input

Starting emergency recording disk space a sig-

nal input

Earth (Grounding)

!, !

Alarm output for available

disk space of device con-

nected to copy port

Generation of signal output for disk space alarm- Open collector output

ing of DVD-RAM, DVD-R, CD-R

24 V max., 100 mA

Signal output upon detection of HDD error

Signal output upon detection of camera error

Signal output upon detection of unit error

HDD error output

Camera error output

Error output

End of outage process-

ing

Signal output upon completion of outage pro-

cessing

High (+12 V)

Time of this unit is adjusted to the preset time

30 kΩ 5 V pull-up,

according to the signal input. This signal output is –100 mA/make contact

then generated for the setting time of this unit.

Time of all other units is adjusted to the setting

time of this unit.

Time adjustment I/O

Sequence changeover is effected according to

the signal input. Signal output is generated at the

time of sequence changeover.

Sequence changeover

I/O

The state of alarm suspension is assumed

according to the signal input.

Alarm suspension input

Outage detection I/O

Start of outage processing according to the sig-

nal input.

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA/5 V pull-up

External recording mode

changeover

Changeover to the external recording mode

+5 V output

200 mA max.

● Connection for emergency recording

When the external switch is turned ON, emergency recording will be started.

Resolution, recording time, recording rate and quality for emergency recording can differ according to the settings of

"Emergency REC" of "Recording" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 98.)

(Earth)

(Emergency record input)

External switch

ALARM/CONTOROL

● Connection for external recording changeover

When the external switch is turned ON, the recording program changeover is effected for recording.

The recording program can be set for "EXT." with the "Time Table" of "Schedule" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 106.)

(Earth)

(External recording mode)

External switch

ALARM/CONTOROL

● Connection to synchronize the sequential display changeover (when multiple

units are used)

Sequential display changeover is effected with the timing of supplied signals to the sequence changeover input terminal.

When multiple units are used, the sequence timing can be synchronized.

Setting for the sequence timing can be set with "Sequence Timing" of "Switcher" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 110.)

For the synchronization of the sequence timing between multiple units, there is a difference in the sequence timing setting as

shown below between the synchronized side (Master) and the synchronizing side (Slave).

Synchronized side (Master): Set at "INT" (functioning as an output terminal)

Synchronizing side (Slave): Set at "EXT" (functioning as an input terminal)

(Earth)

(Sequence changeover input)

(Sequence changeover output)

ALARM/CONTOROL

WJ-HD316 (First unit)

ALARM/CONTOROL

WJ-HD316 (Second unit)

● Connection for the Auto Adjust Time function

• When "Auto Adjust Time" of "System" on the SETUP MENU is set to "MASTER"

"Time Adjust Output" becomes available and the clock of this unit can be applied to other units.

Terminal block of other units

Front LED

(Earth)

(Time adjust output)

monitor

output

ALARM/CONTOROL

• When "Auto Adjust Time" of "System"on the SETUP MENU is set to "SLAVE"

"Time Adjust Input" becomes available. When a signal output from other equipment is supplied to the time adjust I/O terminals

between 00 minutes 00 seconds and 14 minutes 59 seconds every hour or between 45 minutes 00 seconds and 59 minutes

59 seconds every hour, the clock will be set to "00 minutes 00 seconds" of the closest hour.

Example:

Signal is supplied at 2:50:00 (hour:minute:second)pm → Set at 3:00:00 pmM

Signal input supplied at 3:14:45 pm → Set at 3:00:00 pm

Signal is supplied at 3:20:00 pm → Time will not be adjusted.

Terminal block of other units

Front LED

(Earth)

(Time adjust output)

monitor

output

ALARM/CONTOROL

Important:

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds when changing the present time (accurate within 5 seconds) using

the time adjustment input (pin no.20).

● Connection with the Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)

This is an example of connection with the uninterruptible power system (UPS) to be installed to protect from a power outage.

When a signal is supplied to the outage detection I/O terminals from the uninterruptible power system (UPS), internal process-

ing (stops recording safely) will be started to shut off the power supply for this unit.

After completing the internal processing, a signal will be supplied from the outage processing end output terminal to the unin-

terruptible power system (UPS). Then, the power supply to this unit can be suspended.

(GND)

（COM）

(Detection)

(Shutdown)

(Outage detection I/O)

(Outage processing end output)

* Refer to the operating

instructions of the used

product for further

This unit

information about

connection of the UPS side.

Uninterruptible

power system

(UPS)

Power cable

To an AC outlet

ALARM/CONTOROL

● Connection of the control output

• When an alarm device such as a buzzer or a lamp is connected, the signal output from Pin Nos. 15 - 18 can be used to

notify the status by sounding a buzzer or lighting a lamp.

• The following example is of a connection with the HDD error output (pin no. 16).

(GND)

(HDD error output)

Alarming device

Relay, etc.

Install according

to your needs

ALARM/CONTOROL

■ How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM Connector

These terminals are used to connect the alarm devices, such as sensors, door switches, etc.

The pin configurations of these terminals are as shown below. The connector used should be compatible with the pin configu-

ration.

Pin Configuration

ALARM

The pin array is different from other disk recorders. Make sure that the connection is correct referring to the following.

Pin No.

Ch 1 alarm input

Ch 2 alarm input

Ch 3 alarm input

Ch 4 alarm input

Ch 5 alarm input

Ch 6 alarm input

Ch 7 alarm input

Ch 8 alarm input

Ch 1 alarm output

Ch 2 alarm output

Ch 3 alarm output

Ch 4 alarm output

Earth (Grounding)

Ch 9 alarm input

Ch 10 alarm input

Ch 11 alarm input

Ch 12 alarm input

Ch 13 alarm input

Ch 14 alarm input

Ch 15 alarm input

Ch 16 alarm input

Ch 5 alarm output

Ch 6 alarm output

Ch 7 alarm output

Operation

Remarks

Event action will be performed according

to the settings.

Non-voltage make contact/–100 mA,

5 V pull-up

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event

occurrence

Open collector output/24 V, 100 mA

!, !

Event action will be performed according

to the setting.

Non-voltage make contact input/

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event

occurrence

Open collector output/24 V max.,

100 mA

● Alarm connection

When a signal is supplied to the alarm input terminals of CH 1-16, recording and displaying of camera images will be per-

formed according to the settings.

When an alarm device such as a buzzer, a lamp, etc., is installed outside, connect them to the alarm output terminals (pin nos.

9 - 12, pin nos. 23 - 25) or to the alarm output terminals (pin nos. 1 - 9) of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal.

Sensor

Security door

switch

(Ch 1 alarm output)

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

(GND)

ALARM

(Ch 16 alarm output)

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

(GND)

ALARM/CONTOROL

Install according to

your needs.

Time and polarities of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal and the ALARM terminal

Terminal

Active time

Note

Alarm input

100 ms or more

N.O.: L active

N.C.: H active

Alarm output

The set time on the SETUP MENU

100 ms or more

L active

Alarm reset input

Emergency recording input

100 ms or more

Alarm output for available disk space of While the size of the available disk

device connected to the copy port

space is less than the set size

Until the HDD error is cleared

Until the camera error is cleared

Until the error is cleared

100 ms

HDD error output

L active

H active

L active

Camera error output

Error output

Outage processing end output

Time adjust I/O

Input: 100 ms or more

Output: 1 s

Sequence changeover output

Outage detection output

100 ms or more

L active

External recording mode changeover

Alarm suspend output

L active, judged by level

■ How to Use the SERIAL Connector

This connector is compliant with the RS232C Standard, and is used to communicate with a connected PC.

A connection example and the pin configuration of the SERIAL connector are as shown below.

Important:

• When using the SERIAL connector, it is necessary to perform the settings with "RS232C Setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP

MENU for the communication functions. (Page 117)

● Pin Configuration

Serial connector of this unit

D-sub Pin 9 (Female)

Personal computer side

D-sub Pin 9 (Female)

(Locally procured)

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

WJ-HD316

PC or another device

Connection example of cross cable

● Connection example

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Personal compute

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

SETUP

To operate this unit, it is necessary to set each item of the SETUP MENU in advance.

Perform the settings for each item of the SETUP MENU by displaying the SETUP MENU on monitor 2.

Settings items are as below.

■ Item list of the SETUP MENU

Settings menu

Maintenance

Description

Page

REC Rate

Display the recording rate for each recording mode and image quality for each

camera channel in list form.

Disk Info

Display hard disk information such as the available disk space on the built-in hard

disk and the connected optional extension unit.

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Display version information of the software and the hardware and the MAC

address.

Set actions to be taken when the available space of the built-in hard disk or of the

connected external recording device reaches a specified level.

Set to display a warning when the available space of the built-in hard disk or of the

connected external recording device reaches a specified level.

Delete data stored on the hard disk, or format (initialize) the DVD-RAM disk con-

nected to the COPY port.

Event Log

Error Log

Display the event log. Refer to page 45 for further information.

Display the error log such as a HDD error log.

Access Log

Display the time, user name and IP addresses when logging in/out to/from this

unit.

Recording

REC Setup

Perform the basic settings for recording.

Emergency REC

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as recording time and record-

ing rate.

Event

Event Setup

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and the buzzer sound when an

event (motion detection, video loss, command/terminal alarm) occurs.

VMD Setup

Perform the settings for the motion detection area, sensitivity and the detection

mode for each camera channel.

Alarm Setup

Perform the settings for the alarm display duration and alarm suspension duration.

Specify the alarm terminal polarity.

102

103

Terminal Setup

Schedule

Time Table

Create timetables for each day of the week, and assign the recording action pro-

grams and event action programs to the created timetables.

106

REC Program

Up to 4 recording programs can be created. Perform the settings for the recording

actions for each program such as image quality and recording rate for each cam-

era channel.

104

106

108

Event Program

Special Days

Up to 4 event programs can be created. Perform the settings for each program

such as the event action and the auto copy function for each event type.

Assign timetables independently for special days aside from other days.

Description

Page

Settings menu

Switcher

Monitor1

Perform the settings for the image switching on monitor 1 such as the setting of

the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on monitor 1.

109

111

Monitor 2

Display

Perform the settings for the image switching on monitor 2 such as the setting of

the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on monitor 2.

OSD Setup

Monitor1

Monitor2

Perform the display settings such as the settings for the display position of the

camera title and the time.

112

113

114

Perform the display settings for monitor 1 such as the camera title display on/off,

the alarm display on/off and the time display on/off.

Perform the display settings for monitor 2 such as the display mode (task bar

style), the camera title display position, and the camera title display on/off.

Comm

Camera Control

PS·Data Setup

Set the communication type to control cameras for each camera channel.

115

Perform the settings for the PS·Data. It is necessary to perform these settings

when connecting an external device such as a controller to the DATA port on the

rear panel of this unit.

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

Perform the settings for the RS485. It is necessary to perform these settings when

connecting an RS 485 compatible camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port on the

rear panel of this unit.

116

117

118

Perform the settings for the SERIAL (RS232C). It is necessary to perform these

settings when connecting a PC to the SERIAL connector on the rear panel of this

unit.

Perform the basic network settings. It is necessary to perform these settings when

operating this unit via a network such as a LAN. The settings for the user authenti-

cation and the host authentication can also be set with these settings.

Perform the network connection settings such as IP addresses and the gateway

address. It is necessary to perform these settings when operating this unit via a

network such as a LAN.

118

119

Perform the NTP server settings such as the NTP server address and the time

zone setting. It is necessary to synchronize the clock with the NTP server.

System

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

Perform the settings for the basic operation of this unit.

120

121

122

Perform the settings for the time adjustment and display of the time and date.

Perform the settings for the user registration and the user authentication such as

user name, password and operational level.

User Edit

Edit the registered user information.

Delete registered users.

123

User Delete

Host Regist.

as IP address and operational level for the host authentication.

Host Edit

Edit the registered hosts.

124

125

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Delete the registered hosts.

Perform the settings to specify operable functions for each level.

The set contents can be saved or loaded.

Note: Refer to page 126 for further information about the settings using the setup menu of camera.

■ About the SETUP MENU

Main menu

Live image

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Switcher

Display

Comm

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Main area

Submenu

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Main menu: These menus are always displayed on the SETUP MENU.

Live image: Live images from the camera channel that was selected just before the SETUP MENU was displayed.

Main area: The setting items of the selected submenu will be displayed in this area.

Submenu: The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed on the left side of the SETUP MENU. The submenus dif-

fer depending on the selected main menu.

■ Basic Operation with the SETUP MENU

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more

v Perform the settings for each item.

when displaying live images.

Item selection: Move the cursor using the arrows but-

ton (C D A B).

Change the setting: Rotate the jog dial.

[Screenshot 1]

The top page of the SETUP MENU will be displayed.

Pop-up display of the setting item: Press the SET but-

ton when the setting item has the "SETUP" button

next to the item name.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

Turning pages of the settings menu: When "PREV/

NEXT PAGE" is displayed on the bottom of the set-

tings menu, move the cursor to the "PREV/NEXT

PAGE" using the arrows button, and then use the

arrows button (AB) to turn the pages.

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Selecting a submenu again: Press the SET button.

The cursor will be able to select a submenu again.

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

x Select a main menu using the arrows button and press

b After completing the settings, press the SETUP/ESC

button for 2 seconds or more to apply the settings. The

SETUP MENU will be closed.

the SET button.

→ Live images will be displayed again.

[Screenshot 2]

The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed.

Important:

If the settings are changed, all login users will be force-

fully logged out.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

OFF

All

REC Setup

Recording

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

■

Emergency REC

REC Priority

PRIORITY

REC MODE

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

Audio Allocation

AUDIO

■

CAMERA

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

c Select the submenu using the arrows button (CD) and

the press the SET button.

When selecting the submenu by the cursor is enabled,

press the SETUP/ESC button. The main menu can be

selected.

[Screenshot 3]

The setting items will be displayed in the main area and the

cursor will move to a setting item.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Setup

Resolution

Recording Time

Recording Rate and Quality

FIELD

10s

■

Emergency REC

RATE

3ips

Quality

RATE

3ips

Quality

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

SFA CAM9

SFA CAM10

SFA

SFA CAM12

SFA CAM13

SFA CAM14

SFA CAM15

SFA CAM16

SFA

CAM11

Auto Copy

OFF

■

■ [Maintenance] Functions for Maintaining

Perform the settings for the hard disk drives.

It is possible to check the histories (log) of event occur-

rence, error occurrence and access.

Notes:

• The displayed available disk space on this menu

will not include the space required for data man-

agement. Therefore, the understated available disk

space will be displayed.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

• When CONTINUE is selected for "Disk End Mode" of

"Maintenance", available disk space will be dis-

played as "--".

• "**" will be displayed to refer to a disk that is not

connected or not existed area on the disk.

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

• Hour meter warning setting

Select the duration as the maximum active time of the

hard disk from the followings. Warning will be displayed

when the set time have passed. Hard disk drives will

need to be replaced after around 20 000 - 30 000 hours

of operation in case they are used at temperature of

25 ˚C (77 ˚F). (Refer to page 6.)

q [REC Rate] Check the recording rate and the

image quality for each camera channel.

Recording rate for each recording mode for each cam-

era (as shown below) will be displayed in list form.

10 000 h/20 000 h/30 000 h

• HDD safety mode

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Schedule

System

LIVE

Comm

When maintaining (HDD replacement, installation, etc.)

without turning the power of the unit off, select ON for

"HDD Safety Mode". The unit will be restarted in the

HDD Safety Mode. Refer to page 67 for further informa-

tion.

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

(The default setting is ON.)

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

MANU: Manual recording

SCHE: Schedule recording

PRE EVT: Pre-event recording

e [Version Info] Check the version information

Version information of the software and the hardware,

and the MAC address will be displayed.

POST EVT: Post-event recording

EMR: Emergency recording

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Rate

Software

Hardware (M)

(V)

V1.00

■

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

w [Disk Info] Check the available hard disk space

Mac Address

AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF

■

The available hard disk space of the following will be

displayed: The built-in hard disk (normal recording

area, event recording area and copy area), optional

extension unit (EXT1 - 7), DVD-RAM, CD-R and DVD-R

disk drive connected to the copy port (COPY1 or

COPY2).

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Refer to page 25 for more details on the built-in hard

disk.

It is also possible to perform the settings for the hour-

meter (the active time of the HDD) warning and for the

HDD safety mode with this menu.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Rate

Remaining

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

MAIN

EXT7

EXT6

EXT5

EXT4

EXT3

EXT2

EXT1

Normal REC Area

Event REC Area

Copy Area

1800GB

Disk Info

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

1200GB

1000GB

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

COPY 1 (Rear)

COPY 2 (Front)

Event Log

Error Log

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

3000h

OFF

■

Access Log

r [Disk End Mode] Set actions to be taken when

y [Data Delete] Delete image data on the hard

the available hard disk space has run out

disk

Select an action from the followings to be taken when

the available space of the built-in hard disk (normal

recording area, event recording area, copy area) or the

external recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R

disk drive) connected to the copy port (COPY1,

COPY2) is running out.

Delete image data on the built-in hard disk (normal

recording area/event recording area).

Auto deletion and manual deletion are available to

delete image data.

It is also possible to initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk

with this menu.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

HDD

Auto Delete

REC Rate

■

REC Rate

■

OFF

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

COPY1

COPY2

CONTINUE

STOP

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 01 03

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before JAN

Disc Format of DVD

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

STOP

■

STOP

DELETE

COPY1

FORMAT

COPY2

Event Log

Error Log

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

CONTINUE: When the available disk space has run

out, old data will be overwritten by new data. In this

case, the oldest data is the first to be overwritten.

STOP: When the available disk space has run out,

recording and copying will be canceled.

● Auto Delete

It is possible to delete recorded images automatically when

the set days have passed from the day the image was

recorded. Refer to a system administrator for further infor-

mation.

Important:

Available days for the auto delete function are as follows.

The auto delete function will not work when OFF is selected.

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/3DAYS/4DAYS/5DAYS/6DAYS/

7DAYS/8DAYS/9DAYS/10DAYS/14DAYS/30DAYS/45DAYS/

60DAYS/90DAYS/120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

When changing the setting of CONTINUE to STOP dur-

ing overwriting, the oldest 1 hour’s worth of recorded

images will be deleted. It is impossible to recover the

deleted images even though set to CONTINUE again.

t [Disk Capacity] Set actions to be taken when

● Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

By setting the time and date, images in the normal record-

ing area of the hard disk that were recorded up until a day

before the set time and date will be deleted.

Enter a 2-digit number for the year when entering the time

and date.

the available disk space is running out

Select an action from the following to be taken when the

available space of the built-in hard disk (normal record-

ing area, event recording area, copy area) or the exter-

nal recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R disk

drive) connected to the copy port (COPY1, COPY2)

reaches a specified level.

The setting range is between 1 % and 10 % (in 1 %

intervals).

The warning will not be issued when OFF is selected.

● Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

By setting the time and date, images in the event recording

area of the hard disk that were recorded up until a day

before the set time and date will be deleted.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

HDD Capacity Warning

REC Rate

■

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

COPY1 Capacity Warning

COPY2 Capacity Warning

OFF

Disk Info

● Disc Format of DVD

Initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk in the DVD-RAM drive

connected to the copy port.

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

■

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Important:

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Disk End Mode", a

warning will not be issued.

u [Event Log] Check the event log

i [Error Log] Check the error log

Event log (time and date at an event occurrence,

details) will be displayed in list form.

Refer to page 45 for further information about each

event.

Error log will be displayed in list form.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

No.

Time&Date

Event

REC Rate

001 MAR.25.03 11:50:11 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

002 MAR.25.03 11:49:22 PM AL 1-0312312359

003 MAR.25.03 11:39:21 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

004 MAR.25.03 11:33:22 PM CAM LOSS1

005 MAR.25.03 11:30:26 PM PWR RECOVER

006 MAR.25.03 11:24:11 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

007 MAR.25.03 11:20:11 PM AL1-0312312359

008 MAR.25.03 11:11:11 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

009 MAR.25.03 11:10:31 PM CAM LOSS1

010 MAR.25.03 11:09:28 PM PWR RECOVER

011 MAR.25.03 11:04:52 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

012 MAR.25.03 10:59:12 PM AL1-0312312359

013 MAR.25.03 10:51:00 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

014 MAR.25.03 10:43:54 PM COM LOSS1

015 MAR.25.03 10:37:59 PM PWR RECOVER

016 MAR.25.03 10:35:13 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

017 MAR.25.03 10:24:03 PM AL1-0312312359

018 MAR.25.03 10:06:42 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

019 MAR.25.03 09:58:29 PM COM LOSS1

020 MAR.25.03 09:24:14 PM PWR RECOVER

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

No.

Time&Date

Event

REC Rate

001 MAR.25.03 11:50:11 PM

002 MAR.25.03 11:49:22 PM

003 MAR.25.03 11:39:21 PM

004 MAR.25.03 11:33:22 PM

005 MAR.25.03 11:30:26 PM

006 MAR.25.03 11:24:11 PM

007 MAR.25.03 11:20:11 PM

008 MAR.25.03 11:11:11 PM

009 MAR.25.03 11:10:31 PM

010 MAR.25.03 11:09:28 PM

011 MAR.25.03 11:04:52 PM

012 MAR.25.03 10:59:12 PM

013 MAR.25.03 10:51:00 PM

014 MAR.25.03 10:43:54 PM

015 MAR.25.03 10:37:59 PM

016 MAR.25.03 10:35:13 PM

017 MAR.25.03 10:24:03 PM

018 MAR.25.03 10:06:42 PM

019 MAR.25.03 09:58:29 PM

020 MAR.25.03 09:24:14 PM

LOSS16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

COM-8

LOSS-16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

Disk Info

Event Log

Error Log

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Access Log

PREV/NEXT PAGE

Event Log

Error Log

Note: Up to 100 error logs can be kept. When more

than 100 error logs are filed, old error log will be

overwritten by new error log. In this case, the oldest

log is the first to be overwritten.

Access Log

COM-8

PREV/NEXT PAGE

COM: Command alarm

EMR: Emergency recording

LOSS: Video loss

TRM: Terminal alarm

VMD: Motion detection

Note: Up to 750 event logs can be kept. When more

than 750 event logs are filed, old event log will be

overwritten by new event log. In this case, the old-

est log is the first to be overwritten.

Indication

AL*-YYMMDDhhmmss

Description

Asterisk (*) indicates the camera chan-

Cause

Detects alteration

nel number

YYDDMMhhmmss indicates the played

time when the alteration was detected.

W-ERR X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the hard disk error

Y indicates the disk number in the unit

(unit number)

Failed to write data on the HDD

Auto removal of the link

REMOVE X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the hard disk that has been

removed from the subject for recording.

Y indicates the disk number in the

unit/unit number

#-FULL

# indicates the partition name/external

recording device port number

No available disk space

THERMAL -X

FAN X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number in

which the thermal error occurred

Thermal error

X indicates the unit/unit number

Y indicates the fan number (1-4)

Y will be left out if the malfunctioning

fan is in the extension unit

The fan is malfunctioning

#-nn%

# indicates the partition name of the

hard disk/external recording device

nn indicates the available disk space

Warning that the disk space is running

out

Indication

Description

Cause

HDD SMART error

SMART X-Y

PWR LOSS

H.METER X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the hard disk error

Y indicates the unit/unit number

Detects a power outage

Hour-meter warning

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the hard disk error

Y indicates the unit/unit number

PROTECT -#

NO DISK -#

MEDIUM -#

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Disk has the write protection

Disk is not inserted

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device is connected

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Incompatible disk

UNFORMATTED -#

W-ERR (MEDIUM-#)

PWR RECOVER

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Unformatted disk

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device is connected DVD-RAM, DVD-R)

Failed to write data on the disk (CD-R,

Recover from a power outage

Notes:

o [Access Log] Check the access log

• Up to 100 access logs can be kept. When more

than 100 access logs are filed, old access logs will

be overwritten by new access logs. In this case, the

oldest log is the first to be overwritten.

The time, user name and IP addresses when logging

in/out to/from this unit will be displayed in list form.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

• Logs of accesses via an FTP will not be displayed.

LIVE

REC Rate

No.

Time&Date

Event

001 MAR.25.03 11:50:11 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

002 MAR.25.03 11:49:22 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

003 MAR.25.03 11:39:21 PM tshimi IN

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

004 MAR.25.03 11:33:22 PM tshimi OUT

005 MAR.25.03 11:30:26 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

006 MAR.25.03 11:24:00 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

007 MAR.25.03 11:20:11 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

008 MAR.25.03 11:11:23 PM tshimi IN

009 MAR.25.03 11:10:31 PM tshimi OUT

010 MAR.25.03 11:09:28 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

011 MAR.25.03 11:04:52 PM 192.168 100.100 IN

012 MAR.25.03 10:59:12 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

013 MAR.25.03 10:51:11 PM tshimi IN

014 MAR.25.03 10:43:54 PM tshimi OUT

015 MAR.25.03 10:37:59 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

016 MAR.25.03 10:35:13 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

017 MAR.25.03 10:24:03 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

018 MAR.25.03 10:06:42 PM tshimi IN

Event Log

Error Log

019 MAR.25.03 09:58:29 PM tshimi OUT

020 MAR.25.03 09:24:14 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

Access Log

PREV/NEXT PAGE

**IN: The user name or the IP address displayed before

IN indicates the user/host logged in.

**OUT: The user name or the IP address displayed

before OUT indicates the user/host logged out.

**: A user name (first 15 characters) or host name will

be displayed.

■ [Recording]

Perform the settings for the basic recording (REC Setup)

and the emergency recording.

• [Manual Recording Channel]

Select a camera channel for manual recording from the

followings. Refer to page 19 for manual recording.

MON2: Images from the camera channel currently dis-

played on monitor 2 will be recorded.

ALL: Images from all the camera channels will be

recorded.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

OFF

All

REC Setup

Recording

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

■

Emergency REC

REC Priority

PRIORITY

REC MODE

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

Audio Allocation

AUDIO

■

CAMERA

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

Important:

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

Even though "MON2" is selected, images from all the

camera channels will be recorded while neither the

sequential display nor live images are displayed on

monitor 2.

q [REC Setup] Perform the settings for the basic

When "MON2" is selected, images from a camera chan-

nel for another manual recording that has started later

will be recorded regardless of the operation using the

buttons on the front panel or via a network.

recording.

Perform the following settings for the basic recording.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

• [Embedded REC (Title)]

OFF

All

REC Setup

Recording

■

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to record

a displayed camera title together as a part of the

recorded image.

Power ON Manual REC

Emergency REC

Manual Recording Channel

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

REC Priority

PRIORITY

REC MODE

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

ON: Record camera titles together as a part of the

recorded image.

Audio Allocation

AUDIO

■

CAMERA

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

OFF: Does not record camera titles.

• [Embedded REC (Time & Date)]

• [Recording]

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to record

the displayed time and date together.

ON: Record the time and date together as a part of the

recorded image.

Select ON or OFF to record or not record.

ON: Recording will be performed.

OFF: No recording will be performed.

OFF: Does not record the time and date.

Important:

When OFF is selected for this setting, no recordings will

be performed. Select ON for normal use except when it

is necessary to stop recording forcefully such as when

trouble has occurred with the unit.

Important:

It is possible to select ON or OFF to determine whether

or not to display the camera title recorded together with

the images, even though OFF is selected. (Refer to

page 113, 114.)

• [Power ON Manual REC]

When ON is selected, it is impossible to hide the cam-

era title and the time and date. (Refer to page 113,

114.)

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to start

recording when the power is turned on by the connect-

ed external timer (or the switch).

ON: Manual recording will start automatically after com-

pleting the system check.

OFF: Manual recording will not start automatically after

completing the system check.

• [REC Priority]

Assigns priorities to recording modes. Assigns priorities

1 (highest) - 3 (lowest) to each recording mode. When

two or more recordings are performed in the same peri-

od, only a recording with highest priority will be per-

formed.

Important:

When ON is selected, manual recording will start auto-

matically after completing the system check.

Refer to page 19 for further information about each

recording mode.

Set to ON except when it is necessary to stop recording

forcefully such as when the unit is malfunctioning.

Important:

• When event pre-recording and post-recording are to be

performed with selecting "1" for priority of event record-

ing, it is impossible to perform manual recording.

• [Audio Allocation]

• [Recording Time]

Allocates audio from the audio input connectors (1 - 4)

on the rear panel of the unit to camera channels.

Allocate audio in accordance with channels of connect-

ed cameras. When OFF is selected, audio will not be

heard.

Perform the settings for the recording time and record-

ing action for emergency recording.

The following are available for the recording time.

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

20 s/30 s

1 m - 10 m (in 1 minute intervals)

20 m/30 m/40 m/50 m/60 m

Important:

• When a live image from the audio assigned camera

channel is displayed on a single screen on monitor 2,

audio will be heard. When displaying on a multi-screen,

audio will not be heard.

• When images from the audio assigned camera channel

are displayed on a single screen, recorded audio will

be heard. When displaying on a multi-screen, recorded

audio will not be heard.

MANUAL: Recording will continue while the external

switch is being held down.

CONTINUE: Recording will not stop until the ALARM

RESET button on the front panel of the unit is

pressed.

• [Recording Rate and Quality]

Perform the settings for the recording rate and image

quality for emergency recording.

The following are available for the recording rate.

OFF/1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/

30 ips/60 ips

• Audio will be recorded regardless of whether you are

displaying on a single screen or a multi-screen.

• Audio may be recorded fragmentary occasionally.

w [Emergency REC] Perform the settings for

Important:

emergency recording

• When OFF is selected for a specified camera channel,

images from a camera channel set to OFF will not be

recorded.

• When "FRAME 3D ON" or "FRAME 3D OFF" is selected,

the total recording rates of CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for the

WJ-HD316) must be less than 30 ips.

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as

the recording time or recording rate for emergency

recording.

Refer to page 21 for further information about emer-

gency recording.

• When "FIELD" is selected, the total recording rates of

CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for the WJ-HD316) must be less than

60 ips.

• When "SIF" is selected, the total recording rates of CAM

1 - CAM 16 (for the WJ-HD316) must be less than

120 ips.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Setup

Resolution

Recording Time

Recording Rate and Quality

FIELD

10s

■

Emergency REC

RATE

3ips

Quality

RATE

3ips

Quality

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

SFA CAM9

SFA CAM10

SFA

CAM11

SFA

SFA CAM12

SFA CAM13

SFA CAM14

SFA CAM15

SFA CAM16

• When "FRAME 3D ON", "FRAME 3D OFF" or "SIF" is

selected, it is impossible to select 60 ips.

Auto Copy

OFF

■

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

• [Resolution]

Select a recording resolution from the following.

FRAME 3D ON: High resolution (720 x 480), with cam-

era shake compensation

FRAME 3D OFF: High resolution (720 x 480)

FIELD: Standard resolution (720 x 240)

SIF: Low resolution (360 x 240)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

• [Auto Copy]

Important:

Select ON or OFF to set whether or not to automatically

copy images recorded by emergency recording onto

the copy area on the built-in hard disk or DVD-RAM

disk.

• It is recommended to set same value for the resolution

of emergency recording as the resolution of manual

recording, event recording and schedule recording.

• Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

from the beginning of emergency recording when the

resolution is switched.

Important:

When OFF is selected for "Auto Copy" on "Basic setup"

of "System", the auto copy function will not work after

emergency recording even though ON is selected for

this setting. Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for

"Auto Copy".

■ [Event] Function for Events

Perform the settings for event actions of each event type

(motion detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal

alarm).

The following are available for the buzzer sound dura-

tion.

When OFF is selected, a buzzer will not sound.

(s: second, m: minute)

OFF: The buzzer will not sound.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

/40 s/50 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m

EXT: The buzzer will continue until the ALARM RESET

button is pressed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

Video Loss

Terminal/Command Alarm

SETUP

■

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

w [VMD Setup] Perform the settings for the

motion detection function

q [Event Setup] Settings for the alarm output

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to enable or

disable the motion detection function for each camera

channel.

When ON is selected, perform the settings for the auto

motion detection area for each camera channel. Up to 4

areas can be set for a camera channel for the detection

area. Refer to page 45 for further information about the

auto motion detection function.

duration and the buzzer duration

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and

the buzzer sound duration for each event type (motion

detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal

alarm).

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

SETUP

■

Video Loss

Terminal/Command Alarm

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Event Setup

VMD Setup

■

OFF

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

SETUP

■

Video Loss Setup

Terminal/Command Alarm Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Alarm Output

Buzzer

■

1 0 s

O K

CANCEL

The following are available for the alarm output dura-

tion.

When OFF is selected, the alarm output will not be sup-

plied.

(s: second, m: minute)

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the camera channel selection menu of

the "VMD Setup" window.

OFF: No alarm output is supplied.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

/40 s/50 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m

EXT: Alarm output will continue until the ALARM RESET

button is pressed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Event Setup

VMD Setup

■

OFF

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Important:

The alarm output duration cannot be set for video loss.

Signals will be supplied continuously from the camera

error output terminal (pin no. 17) of the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear panel during the period

when the video signal is lost. (Refer to page 82.)

z Rotate the jog dial to select ON for a desired camera

channel for which the motion detection function is to be

applied, and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 5]

The motion detection area is set with the start point and the

end point as the points at opposite angles of the motion

detection area.

[Screenshot 2]

The "VMD Setup" window will be displayed.

b Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set another motion detection

area.

Up to 4 areas can be set. The newly created areas will

be named automatically as A, B, C and D in the order of

creation.

x Rotate the jog dial to select "SETUP AREA" on the status

bar.

Note: To set all areas on the monitor as the motion

detection area, select "ALL AREAS" and press the

SET button.

n To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

[Screenshot 3]

The cross cursor will be displayed on the "VMD Setup" win-

dow.

● Delete the motion detection area

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

c Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the start point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button, and press the SET button.

z Rotate the jog dial to select "DELETE AREA" on the sta-

tus bar.

[Screenshot 4]

Note: After selecting "DELETE ALL AREAS", pressing

the SET button will delete all of the motion detection

areas.

The start point of the motion detection area is assigned.

[Screenshot 2]

The cross cursor will be displayed on the "VMD Setup" win-

dow.

v Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the end point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button, and press the SET button.

100

x Move the cross cursor onto an area to be deleted using

● Set the detection mode

the arrows button and press the SET button.

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of

detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a method of

detection in a detection area is available by setting the

detection mode.

c To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

● Set the sensitivity

Set the sensitivity for the created motion detection area.

Sensitivity can be set for each area.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

z Rotate the jog dial to select "VMD MODE" on the status

bar.

[Screenshot 2]

The detection mode menu will be displayed.

z Rotate the jog dial to select "SENSITIVITY" on the status

bar.

[Screenshot 2]

The sensitivity of the selected detection area will be dis-

played.

x Set the detection mode.

Move the cursor to the desired detection mode using

the arrows button (AB).

Move the cursor on the desired detection mode using

the arrows button (A B) and check the radio button

next to the selected mode using the arrows button (D

C).

Refer to the following for further information about each

of the detection modes.

x Move the cross cursor to select an area using the

arrows button (A B).

c Select the sensitivity for the selected area from the fol-

lowing.

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion

detection areas.

OFF: No motion will be detected in this area.

LOW: Low sensitivity

MID: Standard sensitivity

HIGH: High sensitivity

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR

using the arrows button (B) and select an area using

the arrows button (D C). Move the cursor to the para-

meter box of the selected area using the arrows button

(B) and rotate the jog dial to select an interval time for

an object moving between each area from the follow-

ing.

v To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m(min)

101

Move the cursor to the parameter box of each area

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after

being detected in area B.

using the arrows button (B) and select a moving dura-

tion for an object in each area from the following using

the arrows button (DC).

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after

being detected in area C.

When all of the above have occurred, an event action

will be performed.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m

c To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

<DURATION (to detect objects that keep moving in the

area)>

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when an object keeps moving for the set period in

the detection area. For example, in case of the following

settings; 10 sec. for the areas A and B, 20 sec. for area

C and 30 sec. for area D:

● About the Detection mode

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of

detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a method of

detection in a detection area is available by setting the

detection mode.

An event action will be performed when an object

keeps moving for 10 seconds in area A or B, or for 20

seconds in area C, or for 30 seconds in area D.

There are three detection modes as follows.

Important:

Activating two or more detection modes simultaneously

is not possible.

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion

detection areas.

e [Alarm Setup] Perform the settings for the

alarm auto reset and alarm disarm

Perform the settings for the alarm display duration. The

alarm display will automatically disappear when the dis-

play duration has passed. (Alarm Auto Reset)

Perform the settings to suspend the set duration when

the same type of event (motion detection, video loss,

terminal alarm, command alarm) has occurred sequen-

tially so that the event action will not be performed each

time. (Alarm Disarm)

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D

areas.

<VECTOR (to detect object moving to a certain direc-

tion)>

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Auto Reset

Alarm Disarm Time

OFF

■

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when an object moves within the set time to the

other detection area in the set order.

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

10 s

The following is an example.

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after

being detected in area A.

102

• [Alarm Auto Reset]

The following are possible for the alarm auto reset.

When OFF is selected, the alarm display will not auto-

matically disappear.

To erase the alarm display, press the ALARM RESET

button.

OFF/1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

40 s/50 s/1 m/2 m/3 m4 m/5 m

• [Alarm Disarm]

The following are possible for the alarm disarm.

2 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

r [Terminal Setup] Perform the settings for the

alarm terminal polarity.

Select how to supply the signal to the alarm terminal.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Terminal Setup

N.O.

■

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

N.O.: Signals will be supplied when short-circuited.

(Normally Open)

N.C.: Signals will be supplied when open-circuited.

(Normally Closed)

Note: It is possible to set polarities for each of the alarm

inputs 1-16 respectively using a PC via a network.

103

■ [Schedule] Settings for the recording/event action schedule

Perform the settings for the recording schedules of record-

ing and event action by designating a day of the week and

time.

● [Resolution]

Select a resolution for images to be recorded from the fol-

lowing.

A day can be divided into up to 6 time zones, and record-

ing programs and event action programs can be assigned

to each time zone to create a recording schedule.

Up to 4 normal recording programs (REC Program) and up

to 4 event action programs (Event Program) can be creat-

ed. Perform the settings for the REC Program: resolution

and recording rate. Perform the settings for the Event

Program: action mode for each event type and auto copy.

It is possible to create special days apart from the normal

schedule, and a recording program of another day of the

week can be switched to a special day’s program automati-

cally.

FRAME 3D ON: High resolution (720 x 480) with the motion

blur compensation

FRAME 3D OFF: High resolution (720 x 480)

FIELD: Standard resolution (720 x 480)

SIF: Low resolution (360 x 240)

Note: When "FRAME 3D ON" is selected, it is possible to

record a moving object with less blurring.

Important:

In the following cases, recording will not be performed for

around 4 seconds:

• When resolution switched such in case that different

resolution is set depending on different time zones

• When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the

settings

Flowchart how to create a schedule

Follow the procedures below to create schedules.

Create REC Program/Event Program.

(aPage 104 and 106)

● Recording Rate for Each Recording Mode

Perform the settings of recording rate for each recording

mode (manual recording, schedule recording and event

recording).

Create a timetable. (aPage 106)

Assign the maximum recording rate according to the reso-

lution for each recording mode.

The following are the maximum recording rate for each res-

olution.

Assign REC Program/Event Program to a timetable.

(aPage 106)

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON

FRAME 3D OFF

FIELD

Maximum recording rate

q [REC Program] Create a recording program

30 ips

60 ips

120 ips

Perform the settings of resolution, and recording rate for

each recording mode, and the recording rate and

image quality of each camera channel. Up to 4 record-

ing programs can be created.

SIF

The following are available for the recording rate for each

resolution.

OFF/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/

60 ips/120 ips

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

Recording Program 1

Recording Program 2

Recording Program 3

Recording Program 4

Time Table

■

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Important:

• When "FRAME" is selected for "Resolution", "60 ips" and

"120 ips" are not available. When "FIELD" is selected,

"120 ips" is not available.

• The total recording rates for each recording mode must

be less than the maximum recording rate of each reso-

lution.

Recording Program 1

Maintenance

Shedule

System

Resolution

^RecordingFIELD^Event

Comm

SETUP MENU

■

LIVE

Switcher

Recording Table

Display

Manual REC 15 ₁ip_2As_MSchedule REC 15 ₁i₂p_Ps_MEvent ₆R_PE_MC 30 ips

Examples: When "FIELD" is selected and set, the total

recording rates for each recording mode must be

less than 60 ips.

6AM

12AM

Time Table

REC Prog

MANUAL

SCHEDULE

PRE EVENT

POST EVENT

MON

RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY

TIME RATE QUALITY

TIME

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

1ips

30s

AUTO

SFA

TUE

Event Prog

SFA

WED

Special Days

CAM4

SFA

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

SFA

THU

SFA

FRI

SFA

Manual recording: 15 ips

Schedule recording: 15 ips

Event recording: 30 ips

SFA

SAT

SFA

SUN

SFA

EVERY

SFA

EXT.

SFA

P2 P3

CANCEL

^EVTO K ^P1

REC

104

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

● Recording Rate and Image Quality for Each

Camera Channel

Perform the settings for recording rate, image quality and

recording duration for each camera channel (only for event

pre-recording and event post-recording).

Perform the settings for each recording mode. Assign the

recording rate for each camera channel as described in

"Recording Rate for Each Recording Mode" above.

The following are for the recording rate. When OFF is

selected, images from the selected camera channel will not

be recorded.

The following are available for the recording duration (only

event pre-recording and event post-recording).

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

20 s/30 s/1 - 10 m (in 1 minute intervals)

20 - 60 m (in 10 minutes intervals)

OFF/0.1 ips/0.2 ips/0.3 ips/0.4 ips/0.5 ips/1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5

ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

AUTO: The recording rate will be set automatically. (Not

possible for event pre-recording and event post-record-

ing)

MAN. (MANUAL): The recording duration will be as follows

depending on the event type.

• At a motion detection: For 8 seconds

• At a video loss occurrence: During a video loss occur-

rence

• At a terminal alarm occurrence: During the supply of a

signal

• At a command alarm: For 8 seconds

CON. (CONTINUE): Recording will be performed continu-

ously until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

Important:

The total recording rates of each camera channels in

the same recording mode must be less than the record-

ing rate as described in "Recording Rate for Each

Recording Mode" above.

Examples: When selecting "FIELD" for resolution, "15

ips" for manual recording, "15 ips" for schedule

recording, "30 ips" for event recording:

Total recording rates of CAM 1 - 16 (manual recording):

less than 15 ips

Total recording rates of CAM 1 - 16 (schedule record-

ing): less than 15 ips

Total recording rates of CAM 1 - 16 (event recording):

less than 30 ips

Notes:

• When performing event pre-recording from a camera

channel that does not have its own event pre-recording

area, recording time of pre-recording will differ depend-

ing on the settings of "Resolution" and "Recording Rate

and Quality" for event pre-recording. When the set

recording time is longer than the maximum possible

recording time, recording rate of pre-recording will be

displayed in red.

When the total of the recording rates becomes more than

the set value, the recording mode table will turn red.

• When performing event pre-recording from a camera

channel that has its own event pre-recording area,

recording time of pre-recording will differ depending on

the capacity of recording area, the setting of

"Resolution" and "Recording Rate and Quality" for event

pre-recording. When the set recording time is longer

than the maximum possible recording time, recording

rate of pre-recording will be displayed in red. Refer to

page 135 for further information about pre-recording

area.

Recording Program 1

Maintenance

Shedule

System

Resolution

Recording Table

^RecordingFIELD^Event

Display Comm

SETUP MENU

■

LIVE

Switcher

Manual REC 15 ₁ip_2As_MSchedule REC 15 ₁i₂p_Ps_MEvent ₆R_PE_MC 30 ips

6AM

12AM

Time Table

REC Prog

MANUAL

SCHEDULE

PRE EVENT

POST EVENT

TIME RATE QUALITY

MON

RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY

TIME

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

AUTO

SFA

1ips

SFA

1ips

SFA

1ips

SFA

30s

TUE

Event Prog

SFA

WED

Special Days

CAM4

SFA

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

SFA

THU

SFA

FRI

SFA

SAT

SFA

SUN

SFA

EVERY

SFA

EXT.

SFA

P2 P3

CANCEL

^EVTO K ^P1

REC

The total recording rates between recording rates of event

pre-recording and recording rates of event post-recording

for each camera channel must be less than the recording

rate as described in "Recording Rate for Each Recording

Mode" above.

Important:

Event pre- recording image only just recorded will be delet-

ed in the following cases:

• When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the

settings

• When event post-recording is performed newly

• When time zone of a schedule switched and recording

started newly

• When date is been changed

105

Important:

w [Event Program] Create event programs for an

• When "OFF" is selected for "Auto Copy" of "Basic Setup"

on "System", the auto copy function will not work even

though "ON" is selected for this setting.

Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for "Auto Copy".

• Images recorded (by event pre-recording) in the pre-

recording area on the hard disk will not be copied auto-

matically.

event occurrence

Perform the settings of event action for each event type

(motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm)

or of auto copy.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

Recording Program 1

Recording Program 2

Recording Program 3

Recording Program 4

Time Table

■

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

● Video Loss

Perform the settings of event action at a video loss or the

settings of the auto copy function.

The contents to be set are the same as the settings for

"VMD" above.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

Event Action 4

■

Time Table

SETUP

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

Event Program 4

Time Table

■

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Event Program 1

Video Loss

SETUP

VMD

Video Loss

Terminal/Command Alarm

■

Operation Mode

Auto Copy

■

ALARM

OFF

SETUP

O K

CANCEL

● VMD

● Terminal/command alarm

Perform the settings of event action at a motion detection or

the settings of the auto copy function.

Perform the settings of event action at a terminal/command

alarm occurrence or the settings of the auto copy function.

The contents to be set are the same as the settings for

"VMD" above.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

Time Table

■

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Event Program 4

VMD

Operation Mode

Auto Copy

■

ALARM

OFF

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

CANCEL

Time Table

■

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

TermEvineanlt/CPoromgmraamnd4Alarm

■

Operation Mode

Auto Copy

■

ALARM

OFF

CANCEL

Perform the settings for the following operation mode. Refer

to page 45 for further information about each operation

mode.

e [Time Table] Assignment of REC Program and

ACT DET (Activity Detection Mode): Performs only

recording, writing an event log and camera movement

to a preset position at an event occurrence. Other event

actions will not be performed.

ALARM (Alarm Mode): Performs every event action

according to the settings.

Event Program after setting the time zone

Create recording timetables for each day of the week,

and assign REC Program and Event Program to each

timetable. Up to 6 recording programs can be created.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

Auto copy is the function to copy recorded images auto-

matically onto the copy area of the hard disk or the DVD-

RAM disk.

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

Time Table

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Select ON or OFF to enable or disable the auto copy func-

tion.

ON: Enable the auto copy function

OFF: Disable the auto copy function

SAT

SUN

DAILY

EXT

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

Do the following to create timetables.

106

[Screenshot 1]

[Screenshot 4]

Start operation after displaying the timetable window.

The radio button for "New Time Table Setup" is checked.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Maintenance

Time Table (MON)

Copy the Other Time Table

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

LIVE

Switcher

TUE

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

New Time Table Setup

Time Table

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

Period 1

Period 2

Period 3

Period 4

Period 5

Period 6

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

00 PM

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

00 PM

00 AM

SAT

O K

CANCEL

SUN

DAILY

EXT

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

z Press the SET button.

v Move the cursor to the start time input box for "Period 1"

using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 2]

The pop-up setting menu of the timetable for every day of

the week will be displayed.

The cursor will be displayed and will move to "MON"

(Monday).

b Rotate the jog dial to set the start time.

The end time can be set in the same way.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set for "Period 2" - "Period 6".

(It is not necessary to set for all of "Period 1" - "Period

6".)

Maintenance

Recording

Event

12PM

Schedule

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

6AM

6PM

n Select OK using the arrows button and press the SET

Switcher

Display

Comm

System

REC

EVT

MON

Time Table

REC

EVT

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

button.

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

SAT

SUN

DAILY

EXT

Notes:

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

• Start time and end time can be set in 15 minutes

intervals.

REC

EVT

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

CANCEL

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

• To copy a timetable that is set for a different day of

the week, select "Copy the Other Time Table" and

select a day of the week by rotating the jog dial in

step 3.

Then, move the cursor to select OK and press the

SET button.

• When the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 6, the settings will be

canceled and the selected timetable window will be

closed.

• Until the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 6, the settings will not be

applied to the selected timetable.

x Select a day of the week using the arrows button (CD)

and press the SET button.

Note: When a signal is supplied from the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear panel the external

recording mode changeover terminal (pin no. 24) of

the unit will work with the set timetable for "EXT."

[Screenshot 3]

The pop-up settings menu of the timetable for the selected

day of the week will be displayed.

Maintenance

Time Table (MON)

Copy the Other Time Table

New Time Table Setup

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

[Screenshot 5]

LIVE

Switcher

TUE

Time Table

Period 1

Period 2

Period 3

Period 4

Period 5

Period 6

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

00 PM

The settings are applied to the selected timetable and the

timetable for all the days of the week will be displayed.

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

00 PM

00 AM

O K

CANCEL

Maintenance

Recording

Event

12PM

Schedule

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

6AM

6PM

Switcher

Display

Comm

System

REC

EVT

MON

Time Table

REC

EVT

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

SAT

SUN

DAILY

EXT

REC

EVT

c Select "New Time Table Setup" using the arrows button

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

(CD) and rotate the jog dial to check the radio button.

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

CANCEL

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

m Move the cursor to the time zone of the day of the week

to which the REC program is to be assigned using the

arrows button.

107

, Rotate the jog dial to select a desired REC program/

Event program.

(Rotating the jog dial changes the displayed REC pro-

gram.)

REC progam will be displayed with different colors.

Orange: REC program 1/Event program 1

Yellow: REC program 2/Event program 2

Pale purple: REC program 3/Event program 3

Indigo blue: REC program 4/Event program 4

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to assign REC program to other

timetables.

. Move the cursor to OK using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

→ The REC program/Event program will be assigned

to the selected time zone and the selected

timetable window will be closed.

Note: When the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 9, the settings will be

canceled and the selected timetable window will be

closed.

r [Special Days] Perform the settings for record-

ing programs for special days

Assign timetables to special days aside from other days

of the week. Timetables for special days can be set for

up to 30 days.

Perform the settings to specify dates as special days

and apply the recording schedule to the special days.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Time Table

DATE

MODE

SUN 16 --

DATE

MODE

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

108

■ [Switcher] Settings for the switcher function

Perform the settings for image switching such as the

sequential display setting or the waiting screen (while log-

ging out) setting for displaying on monitors 1 and 2.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Live Sequence" pop-up menu will be displayed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Live Sequence

Monitor

■

SETUP

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Sequence Timing

■

INT

Auto Skip

OFF

Monitor

Live Sequence

■

SETUP

CAM1

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

INT

Secret View

OFF

CAM1

Secret View

OFF

CANCEL

x Move the cursor to "CAM" of "STEP 1" using the arrows

button.

q [Monitor 1] Switcher function of monitor 1

Perform the settings for the switcher function of monitor

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM".

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Monitor

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Secret View

■

SETUP

INT

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

OFF

CAM1

LIVE

OFF

Live Sequence

SETUP

Monitor

■

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Sequence Timing

■

INT

Auto Skip

OFF

CAM1

Secret View

OFF

CANCEL

● Live Sequence

Perform the settings for the sequential display of live

images as follows.

c Select how to display images from camera channels in

"STEP 1" from the following by rotating the jog dial.

1, 2, ... , 16: Displays an image from the selected cam-

era channel on a single screen.

[Screenshot 1]

1 - 4: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

Start operation from the "Monitor1" menu of "Switcher" on

the SETUP MENU.

5 - 8: Displays images from the camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

9 - 12: Displays images from the camera channels

9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

13 - 16: Displays images from the camera channels

13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

Monitor

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Secret View

■

SETUP

INT

OFF

CAM1

OFF

1 - 9: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

10 - 16 (Only for the WJ-HD316): Displays images

from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split

screen.

z Move the cursor to "Live Sequence" using the arrows

--: Skips the selected step.

button (CD) and press the SET button.

v When displaying image from camera channels "1 - 16"

on a single screen is selected in step 3, select the cam-

era position.

Move the cursor to "PRESET" in "STEP 1" using the

arrows button.

109

[Screenshot 4]

● Auto Skip

The cursor moves to the "PRESET" in "STEP 1".

Select ON of OFF to determine whether or not to skip the

camera channel without supplying the video input signal

because it is not connected, etc.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

ON: Skips a channel if it is not connected.

OFF: Displays a black screen for a channel not connected.

Monitor

Live Sequence

ST■EP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWSE

LLUP

Sequence Timing

■

1-8

9-16

-- INT2s

Auto Skip

■

OFF

■

CAM1

Secret View

■

OFF

1-4

5-8

9-12

5-8

9-12

13-16

16 13-16

● Login Screen

CANCEL

Select a camera image to be displayed during the login

procedure from the following.

CAM1 - 16: Displays an image from the selected camera

channel.

QUAD1 - 4: Displays images from the camera channels 1 -

4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8: Displays images from the camera channels 5 -

8 on a 4-split screen.

b Rotate the jog dial to select a preset position number

for which image is displayed in "STEP 1" from the follow-

ing.

1 - 64: Moves to the selected preset number.

--: Does not move to the preset position.

QUAD9 - 12: Displays images from the camera channels 9

- 12 on a 4-split screen.

n Select "DWELL" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button.

QUAD13 - 16: Displays images from the camera channels

13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

[Screenshot 5]

The cursor moves to"DWELL" in "STEP 1".

7 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera channels 1 -

7 on a 7-split screen.

9 SCREEN 1 - 9: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9 SCREEN 10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays

images from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split

screen.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Monitor

Live Sequence

ST■EP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWSE

LLUP

Sequence Timing

■

1-8

9-16

-- INT2s

Auto Skip

■

OFF

■

CAM1

Secret View

■

OFF

1-4

5-8

9-12

5-8

9-12

13-16

16 13-16

10 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera channels 1

- 10 on a 10-split screen.

CANCEL

13 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera channels 1

- 13 on a 13-split screen.

m Rotate the jog dial to select an interval time to go to the

next sequential step from 1 - 30 seconds (in 1 second

intervals).

16 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera channels 1

- 16 on a 16-split screen.

--: No camera image will be displayed (black screen)

The sequence step is skipped when "0 s" is selected.

Repeat steps 2 and 7 to set for other sequence steps.

● Secret View

, Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

The secret view is a function to display a black screen on

monitor 1 when camera images are displayed with a single

screen on monitor 2. Select ON or OFF to determine

whether to enable or disable the secret view function.

ON: Enables the secret view function. (Camera image dis-

played with a single screen on monitor 2 will be dis-

played while monitor 1 has a black screen.)

→ The settings for the sequential display are set and

the sequence setting menu closes.

Note: If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 8 and

press the SET button, the setting will be canceled

and the sequence setting menu will be closed.

OFF: Disables the secret view function.

● Sequence Timing

Select an image switching way from the following.

INT: Switches images according to the settings for the live

sequence.

EXT: Switches images by signals from an external device.

MON 2: Match with the image switching timing of the live

sequence on monitor 2.

110

w [Monitor 2] Switcher function of monitor 2

Perform the settings for the switcher function of monitor

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Monitor

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

■

SETUP

INT

OFF

CAM1

● Live Sequence

The settings for "Live Sequence" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page 109 for further information.

● Sequence Timing

The settings for "Sequence Timing" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page 110 for further information.

Notes:

• "EXT" is selectable only when an external device that

can transmit a sequence signal is connected.

• The sequence changeover I/O (pin no.21) of the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel will

supply signals when "INT" is selected and will receive

signals when "EXT" is selected.

● Auto Skip

The settings for "Auto Skip" are the same as for "Monitor1".

Refer to page 110 for further information.

● Login Screen

The settings for "Login Screen" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page 110 for further information.

111

■ [Display]

Perform the display settings for monitors 1 and 2 connected

to the unit.

[Screenshot 2]

The camera title pop-up window will be displayed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

■

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

Monitor

■

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM1

Monitor

■

CAM2

■

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

q OSD Setup

x Move the cursor to "CAM1" using the arrows button.

Perform the On Screen Display settings for monitor 1

and monitor 2 such as the settings of camera titles or

the settings of the time display position.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to " CAM1".

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

■

OSD Setup

Camera Title

SETUP

■

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

OSD Setup

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM1

Monitor

Time & Date Display Position

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

Monitor

CAM2

Camera Title Display Position

CAM3

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

● Camera Title

c Select a character to be entered by rotating the jog dial.

Up to 16 characters can be entered.

Perform the settings for the camera title. It is possible to

display a camera title on the monitor 1/monitor 2, and

record it as a part of the recorded image. Do the following

to set the camera title.

v Move the cursor to the right side of the entered charac-

ter using the arrows button.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the camera title.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "OSD Setup" menu.

Notes:

• To correct the entered characters, move the cursor

to the character to be corrected and press the

STOP button to delete it. Enter a correct character

after deleting.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

■

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Monitor

• To copy the camera title that has been set for

another camera channel, follow the procedure

below.

1. Move the cursor to "CAM 1" in step 2 on the pre-

vious page and press the SET button. The fol-

lowing screen will be displayed.

z Move the cursor to "Camera Title" using the arrows but-

Maintenance

Recording

Event

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

CAM2

Copy Another Camera Title

■

ton (C D) and press the SET button.

LIVE

Switcher

CAM1

Display

Comm

CAM1

CAM2

Camera Title

SETUP

■

Common Setup

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM3

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

Time & Date Display Position

Monitor

CAM4

O K

CANCEL

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

2. Select the camera channel for which the cam-

era title is to be copied by rotating the jog dial.

112

3. Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button

and press the SET button. The camera title will

be copied.

Notes:

• When setting the time and date to be recorded together

with images, the time display will be recorded in the

selected position.

• Refer to page 97 for further information about

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)".

• The following characters can be entered for a cam-

era title:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r

s t u v w x y z À Ä Â Æ Ç É Ì Ñ Ò Ö Ù Ü Ø ß à á â ä

å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï ñ ò ó ô ö ù ú ü ø < > = ? ” # & ( )

* + , - . / : ; SP

● Camera Title Display Position

Select a camera title display position from the following.

L-UPPER: Displays the camera title at the upper left of the

[Screenshot 4]

screen.

The camera title is entered.

L-LOWER: Displays the camera title at the lower left of the

screen.

R-UPPER: Displays the camera title at the upper right of

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

the screen.

OSD Setup

Camera Title

CAMT1ime &CDAaMte1 Display Position

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

■

Monitor

R-LOWER: Displays the camera title at the lower right of

Camera Title Display Position

CAM2

ENTRANCE

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

the screen.

CENTER: Displays the camera title at the center of the

screen.

CANCEL

Note: When setting the camera title to be recorded togeth-

er with images, the time display will be embedded in

the selected position.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

OSD Setup

LIVE

Refer to page 97 for further information about

"Embedded REC (title)".

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

■

CAMT9ime &CDAaMte9 Display Position

■

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

■

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

● Line Color on the Multi Screen

CANCEL

Select a line color from the following.

WHITE: Displays white lines.

GRAY: Displays gray lines.

b Press the arrows button to move the cursor to "OK" and

press the SET button.

BLACK: Displays black lines.

→ The camera title will be set and the setting window

of the camera title will be closed.

w [Monitor 1] Settings on monitor 1 display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time,

camera title and alarm display on the monitor 1.

Notes:

• If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 5 and

press the SET button, the setting will be canceled

and the setting window of the camera title will be

closed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Time & Date Display

Camera Title Display

Alarm Display

OSD Setup

■

Monitor

• It is possible to set "Camera Title [Display]" to dis-

play a camera title on the monitor 2 and "Camera

Title [Embedded]" to embed/display a camera title

on the monitor 1 individually using a PC via a net-

work. Refer to the Network Setup Instruction (PDF)

for further information.

● Time & Date Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time.

ON: Displays time.

● Time & Date Display Position

Select a time and date display position from the following.

L-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper left of the screen.

R-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper right of the

screen.

OFF: Does not function.

L-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower left of the screen.

R-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower right of the

screen.

113

● Camera Title Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the camera

title.

ON: Displays the camera title.

OFF: Does not function.

● Alarm Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the alarm dis-

play at an event occurrence.

ON: Displays the alarm display at an event occurrence.

OFF: Does not function.

e [Monitor2] Settings on monitor 2 display

Perform the display settings for monitor 2 such as the

display mode (task bar style), time display position

on/off, camera title display position, etc.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Display Mode

T&D and Status Display Position

Camera Title Display

MODE

LOWER

■

OSD Setup

Monitor

The following explains the settings for monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor such as the display mode (task bar style),

time display position, camera title display ON/OFF, etc.

● Display Mode

Select a display mode (task bar style) from the following.

Refer to page 12 for further information about the task bar.

MODE 1: Select [MODE 1] for the display mode.

MODE 2: Select [MODE 2] for the display mode.

MODE 3: Select [MODE 3] for the display mode.

● T & D and Status Display Position

When selecting MODE 1, select the position of the time and

date display and the status from the following.

UPPER: Displays them in the upper part of the screen.

LOWER: Displays them in the lower part of the screen.

● Camera Title Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the camera

title.

ON: Displays the camera title.

OFF: Does not function.

114

■ [Comm] Settings for communication with other devices

It is necessary to adjust the communication speed and use

the same communication protocol with external devices

such as a controller when connecting those external

devices to the DATA port or the SERIAL connector

(RS232C).

It is also necessary to perform the settings for the network

such as the IP address and the gateway address when

operating this unit a PC via a network such as a LAN.

These are the descriptions of how to perform the required

settings for communication with external devices.

• To prevent operation mistakes, set the unused cam-

era channels to off.

It is possible to compensate for the video signal

transmission loss from the camera when using the

VIDEO IN connector 1 - 8. (cable compensation)

Perform the settings for the cable compensation

according to the length of cable used.

S: When the length of cable used is shorter than

500 m

M: When the length of cable used is longer than

500 m and shorter than 900 m

L: When the length of cable used is longer than

900 m and shorter than 1 200 m

q [Camera Control] Settings for the communica-

tion method and the cable compensation for

camera control

Notes:

• Use 5C-2V cables for the cable compensation.

• Perform the settings for the cable compensation

properly according to the cable length. Otherwise

camera pictures may not be displayed/recorded

correctly.

Select a communication method for each camera chan-

nel to control cameras from the following.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.Data Setup

RS485 Setup

Type of Camera Control

■

CAM

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

COMP

TYPE

COAX

CAM

TYPE

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

RS232C Setup

PSD

NW Setup

w [PS.Data Setup] Settings for the PS·Data

Perform the following settings for the PS·Data.

NTP Setup

RS485

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

001

OFF

9600

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

■

COAX: Controls camera with the coaxial communica-

tion (CAM 1 - 8 CH are available for the WJ-HD316,

CAM 1 - 6 CH are available for the WJ-HD309)

PSD: Controls camera with the PS·Data. (CAM 9 - 16

CH are available for the WJ-HD316, CAM 7 - 9 CH

are available for the WJ-HD309)

RS232C Setup

NONE

NW Setup

OFF

NTP Setup

SETUP

RS 485: Controls camera with the RS 485 communica-

tion. (CAM 1 - 16 CH are available for the WJ-

HD316, CAM 1 - 9 CH are available for the WJ-

HD309)

OFF: Does not control camera (CAM 1 - 16 CH are

available)

● Unit Address (System)

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigning to

PS·Data devices. The addresses must be unique to identify

system devices when connecting multiple devices compati-

ble with PS·Data. Numbers, "001"-"099", are to be assigned

as the unit addresses to the system devices.

Notes:

• Perform settings according to the cameras connect-

ed to this unit.

• CAM 9-16 control 4 cameras each (only for the WJ-

HD316).

● Unit Address (Controller)

The unit address (controller) is used to control a PS·Data

device connected to this unit. Numbers, "001" - "099" are to

be assigned.

• When using the coaxial communication to control

cameras, connect cameras to the VIDEO IN con-

nectors 1 - 8 for the WJ-HD316 (1 - 6 for the WJ-

HD309) (coaxial communication compatible). When

controlling cameras connected to other VIDEO IN

connectors with coaxial communication, use a

coaxial communication unit (WJ-MP204). In this

case, select "PSD" for the communication method

for the camera channels to be controlled through

the coaxial communication unit.

● Cascade

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the cascade con-

nection.

Set this to ON when connecting two or more units or in the

cascade connection.

ON: Select this when connecting units in the cascade con-

nection.

OFF: Does not function.

115

● Baud Rate

[Screenshot 2]

Select the communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

The "Camera Number Setup" pop-up window will be dis-

played.

2 400/4 800/9 600/19 200/38 400 bps

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

● Data Bit

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

8 bit

Camera Number Setup

■

001

Camera Control

Unit Adress(System)

■

Unit Adress(Controller)

^SetupCAM PORT

CAM NO.

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

CAM PORT _OFC_FAM NO.

PS.DATA

Cascade

■

RS485 Setup

009

010

9600

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

■

RS232C Setup

■

^NONE011

NW Setup

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

■

012

OFF

013

■

NTP Setup

■

_S0_ET1_U4_P

015

016

■

● Parity

O K

CANCEL

Select a method to check a transmission error at communi-

cation from the following.

NONE: No parity check

EVEN: Even parity

ODD: Odd parity

x Move the cursor to a desired "CAM No." of "CAM PORT"

using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected "CAM No." of "CAM

PORT".

● Stop Bit

Select a stop bit from the following.

1 bit/2 bit

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

● Retry Timing

Select a retransmission interval for when data reception is

not confirmed from the following.

Camera Number Setup

■

001

Camera Control

Unit Adress(System)

■

Unit Adress(Controller)

^SetupCAM PORT

CAM NO.

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

CAM PORT _OFC_FAM NO.

PS.DATA

Cascade

■

RS485 Setup

009

010

9600

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

■

RS232C Setup

■

^NONE011

NW Setup

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

■

012

OFF

013

■

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

NTP Setup

■

_S0_ET1_U4_P

015

016

■

O K

CANCEL

● Alarm Data

Select a method to inform the connected controller of an

event occurrence from the following.

OFF: Does not function.

0 s: Informs the controller every time an event is detected.

1 s/5 s: Informs the controller when a specified time has

passed after detecting an event.

c Select a camera number by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign camera numbers to the

other CAM PORT.

v Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

● Camera Number Setup

It is possible to assign a number to each camera channel to

operate cameras using the controller compatible with

→ Camera numbers will be assigned and the "Camera

Number Setup" menu will be closed.

PS·Data.

Notes:

Do the following to assign numbers to the camera chan-

nels.

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4

and press the SET button, the settings will be can-

celed and the "Camera Number Setup" menu will be

closed.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "PS·Data Setup" menu.

• The assignment of camera numbers will not be

applied until the SET button is pressed after moving

the cursor to "OK" in step 4.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

001

OFF

9600

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

■

RS232C Setup

e [RS485 Setup] Settings for RS485

NONE

NW Setup

OFF

NTP Setup

Perform the following settings for RS485.

SETUP

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

19200

Baud Rate

Control Camera CH

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

■

SETUP

NONE

z Move the cursor to "Camera Number Setup" using the

RS232C Setup

NW Setup

arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

NTP Setup

116

v Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

● Baud Rate

Select the communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

4 800/9 600/19 200 bps

→ Camera channels and ports to be controlled will be

assigned and the "Control Camera CH" menu will be

closed.

● Control Camera CH

It is possible to assign camera channels to the RS485 ports

1 and 2 as shown below.

Notes:

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4

and press the SET button, the settings will be can-

celed and the "Camera Number Setup" menu will be

closed.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "RS485 Setup" menu.

• The assignment of camera channels will not be

applied until the SET button is pressed after moving

the cursor to "OK" in the step 4.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

• The unit number of the camera will be congruent

with the camera number.

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

19200

Baud Rate

Control Camera CH

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

■

SETUP

NONE

RS232C Setup

NW Setup

● Data Bit

NTP Setup

The data length for communication will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

● Parity

z Move the cursor to "Control Camera CH" using the

Methods to check a transmission error at communication

will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

arrows button (CD) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Control Camera CH" pop-up window will be displayed.

● Stop Bit

Number of stop bit will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

_ControlControl Camera CH

■

19200

SETUP

Camera

Baud Rate

■

Control Camera CH

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

CAMERA

TERM

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

TERM

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

■

CAM1

■

PORT2

NONE

PORT2

CAM2

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

■

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

PORT1

PORT2

NW Setup

PORT1

r [RS232C Setup] Settings for RS232C

NTP Setup

Perform the following settings for RS232C.

O K

CANCEL

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Address(System)

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

■

001

9600

NONE

x Move the cursor to a desired cell in the "TERM" column

RS232C Setup

OFF

Retry Timing

using the arrows button.

NW Setup

NTP Setup

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected cell in the "TERM" col-

umn.

● Unit Address(System)

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigned to

each system device. The addresses must be unique to

identify system devices when connecting multiple system

devices.

Numbers, "001"-"099", are to be assigned as the unit

addresses for the system devices.

_ControlControl Camera CH

■

19200

SETUP

PORT2

NONE

PORT2

Camera

Baud Rate

■

Control Camera CH

Data Bit

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

CAMERA

TERM

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

TERM

■

CAM1

■

Parity

Stop Bit

CAM2

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

■

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

PORT1

NW Setup

PORT1

NTP Setup

O K

CANCEL

● Baud Rate

c Select a port by rotating the jog dial.

Select the communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

9 600/19 200/38 400 bps

PORT 1: Control through the RS485 port 1.

PORT 2: Control through the RS485 port 2.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign other camera channels

to be controlled through the RS485 ports.

117

● Data Bit

● Host Authentication

Select a data length for communication from the following.

7/8 bit

Select ON or OFF whether or not to restrict access by IP

addresses at the time of access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, only PCs with registered IP address

can access this unit

Using the user and host authentication together will

enhance the network security.

● Parity

Select a method to check a transmission error at communi-

cation from the following.

NONE: No parity check

ON: Activates host authentication.

OFF: Does not function.

EVEN: Even parity

ODD: Odd parity

● Line Speed

The line speed will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

● Stop Bit

Select a stop bit from the following.

1/2 bit

● Live Video Quality

Image quality level for a live (FQB: high quality) will be dis-

played.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

● Retry Timing

Select a retransmission interval for when data reception is

not confirmed from the following.

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

y [NW Setup 2] Network connection settings

Perform the following network connection settings to

operate this unit using a PC via a network such as a

LAN.

t [NW Setup 1] Basic network settings

Perform the following basic network settings to operate

this unit using a PC via a network such as a LAN.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.Data Setup

RS485 Setup

DHCP

OFF

■

HTTP Port Number

User Authentication

Host Authentication

Line Speed

00080

OFF

AUTO

FQB

Camera Control

PS.Data Setup

RS485 Setup

■

192

255

192

168

255

168

000

250

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS

Primary

Secondary

DDNS

User Name

User Password

Access Interval

Host Name

HD316

255

000

001

RS232C Setup

MANUAL

000

RS232C Setup

Live Video Quality

000

NW Setup

000

OFF

■

NTP Setup

10m

■

Domain Name

localdomain

● DHCP

● HTTP Port Number

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the DHCP server.

When obtaining IP addresses, net mask and a gateway

address from the DHCP server, set to ON.

If not, set to OFF and enter those addresses manually.

ON: Uses the DHCP server.

Specify the HTTP port number to be used to transfer

images from this unit. It is not necessary to change it for

normal use.

● User Authentication

OFF: Does not use the DHCP server.

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate user authenti-

cation at the time of access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, the user authentication (login) win-

dow will be displayed at the time of access from a PC.

The top page will be displayed if the entered user name

and password are registered.

● IP Address

Enter an IP address when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

For this unit, enter 4 units of the decimal number (0-254).

● Subnet Mask

ON: Activates user authentication.

OFF: Does not function.

Enter a subnet mask according to the network configuration

when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

Note: It is recommended to select ON for the user authenti-

cation for security.

● Gateway

Enter the gateway address according to the network con-

figuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

118

● DNS

● NTP Server Address

Select "MANUAL" or "AUTO" to enable searching an IP

address by its host name using DNS. When "OFF" is select-

ed for "DHCP" (no use of the DHCP server), select "MANU-

AL" and enter the domain name and the DNS server

address. If "ON" is selected for "DHCP" (use of the DHCP

server), select "AUTO". When DNS is not used, select "OFF".

When "MANUAL" is selected for DNS, enter the DNS server

address for "Primary" and "Secondary".

Enter the NTP server address when using the NTP server

for time adjustment.

● Refresh Interval

Select an interval of time inquiry to be transmitted to the

NTP server from the following.

1 h/2 h/6 h/12 h/24 h

Important:

● DDNS

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

Select ON and OFF whether or not to use the DDNS

(Dynamic Domain Name Server).

when changing the present time (accurate within

seconds) using "Time Adjustment".

Selecting ON is available only when "MANUAL" or "AUTO" is

selected for "DNS".

When "ON" is selected, perform the following.

User Name: Enter the user name registered in "DDNS".

Password: Enter the password for the user entered in

"User Name".

Access Interval: Select an interval to update DNS from the

following.

10 m/30 m/1 h/6 h/24 h

● Host Name

Enter the host address registered in DDNS.

Enter a host name of no more than 255 alphanumeric char-

acters. Hyphens (-) are also available for the host name.

● Domain Name

Enter the domain name of this unit.

Enter a domain name of no more than 255 alphanumeric

characters. Hyphens (-) are also available for the domain

name.

u [NTP Setup] Time adjustment of network

Perform the following settings for time adjustment.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

OFF

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Time Adjustment

Time Zone

NTP Server Address

■

GGMMTT+-51:10:000

RS232C Setup

Refresh Interval

■

NW Setup

NTP Setup

● Time Adjustment

Select ON and OFF whether or not to adjust the time with

reference to the NTP server.

ON: Adjusts time with reference to the NTP server.

OFF: Does not function.

● Time Zone

Set the time zone in accordance with the place of use when

using the NTP server for time adjustment.

119

■ [System] Settings on System

Perform the following system settings required to operate

this unit.

Important:

The auto logout function will not be activated when ON

is selected for "Auto Login".

Depending on the user level of the auto login user,

operable functions may be different.

q [Basic Setup] Basic system settings

Perform the following settings for basic operation.

● Priority

Assign operating priorities when multiple users access this

unit simultaneously from the following.

Follow the priority: Operation by a user with higher priority

will be performed.

Pre-priority: Operation by the first accessed user will be

performed regardless of priority.

Post-priority: Operation by the last accessed user will be

performed regardless of priority.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

*****

PSD User

ADMIN

Auto Login

Auto Login User

■

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

ADMIN

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

OFF

■

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

10s

OFF

● ADMIN Password

● "GO TO LAST" before

Set the password for an administrator.

Enter 4-32 alphanumeric characters.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete char-

acters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to

page 55 about available characters.

Select time to be skipped to when the "GO TO LAST" button

is pressed during playback from the following.

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 m/5 m

● Language

Select a language for the SETUP MENU from the following.

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/DEUTSCH/

ITALIANO

● PSD User

When a user operates a controller compatible with PS·Data,

operation will be restricted by the priority and operational

level of the PSD user.

A PSD user should be one of the users registered in this

unit.

● Beep (Operation)

Select ON or OFF whether or not to sound the buzzer when

operating the buttons.

ON: Sounds the buzzer when operating the buttons.

OFF: Does not sound the buzzer when operating the but-

tons.

● Auto Login

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the auto login

function when turning the power of this unit on.

ON: Activates the auto login function.

OFF: Does not activate the auto login function. It is neces-

sary to perform the login operation every time this unit is

started up.

● Buzzer (Error)

Select a buzzer operation when a problem has occurred

from the following.

OFF: Does not sound buzzer when a problem has

occurred.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 m/1 m/3 m/

4 m/5 m (in 1 minute intervals): A buzzer will sound

for the selected duration after a problem has occurred.

EXT: The buzzer will sound continuously until the "ALARM

RESET" button on the front panel of the unit is pressed.

● Auto Login User

When ON is selected for "Auto Login", the user registered

as auto login user in this setting can log in the unit automat-

ically.

An auto login user should be one of the users registered in

this unit.

● Shutdown Time

● Auto Logout

Select ON or OFF whether or not to activate the auto logout

function.

When ON is selected, auto logout will be carried out after a

specified time has passed while displaying live image with-

out operation.

Select a waiting time before starting the internal processing

against the power outage after an outage detection signal

has been supplied to the unit from the following.

10 s/20 s/30 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m

OFF: Does not activate the auto logout function.

1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m/30 m: Activates the auto logout func-

tion when the selected time has passed after login.

120

● Auto Copy

● Auto Adjust Time

ON or OFF whether or not to copy recorded images to the

copy area on the hard disk automatically.

OFF: Does not copy automatically.

ON: Copies recorded images to the copy area on the hard

disk of this unit.

Select a method for auto time adjustment from the follow-

ing.

When "MASTER" is selected, a signal will be supplied from

the ALARM/CONTROL connector as the MASTER time (see

below) at the specified time.

OFF: Does not function.

Important:

MASTER: A signal will be supplied from the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear and the clock of other

devices will be adjusted with reference to the time of

this unit.

• When OFF is selected, the auto copy function at an

event occurrence and emergency recording will not

function.

• The auto copy will not work if a DVD-RAM disk drive is

not connected even though "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is

selected.

SLAVE: A signal will be supplied to the ALARM/CONTROL

connector on the rear and clock of this unit will be

adjusted.

• Images recorded (by event pre-recording) in the pre-

recording area on the hard disk will not be copied auto-

matically.

Important:

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

when changing the present time (accurate within

seconds) using the time adjustment input (pin no.20) of

the ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel.

w [Time & Date] Setting of the date and time

Perform the following settings of the time and date.

● Master Time

Specify the time when supplying a signal from the

ALARM/CONTROL connector.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

■

MMM.DD.YY

12H

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

JAN

12 00 00

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

AUTO

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

■

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

● Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

■

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

Select the way of switching the summer time from the fol-

lowing.

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

OFF: Does not function.

ON: Applies summer time.

AUTO: Applies summer time in accordance with the setting

of the summer time (see next page).

● Date Format

Select a display format for the date from the following. (Ex.

April 1, 2003)

YY.MM.DD: 03.4.1

MMM.DD.YY: APR.1.03

DD.MMM.YY: 1.APR.03

● Summer Time (Day Light Saving) Table

Do the following to specify the start time & date and the end

time & date of summer time.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Time & Date" menu.

● Time Format

Select a display format for the time from the following. (Ex.

3 o’ clock just in the afternoon)

12h: 3:00:00 PM

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

■

MMM.DD.YY

12H

24h: 15:00:00

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

JAN

12 00 00

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

AUTO

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

■

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

● Time Setup

Adjust the current time and date.

■

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Enter year, month, day, hour, minute and second in order,

move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET button.

Important:

z Move the cursor to "Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

Table" using the arrows button (C D) and press the

SET button.

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after set-

ting date and time.

121

[Screenshot 2]

The "Summer Time (Day Light Saving) Table" will be dis-

played.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Basic Setup

LIVE

User Name

■

Time

Date

User Password

User Regist.

User Edit

LV1

CAM1

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

■

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

CAM9

View/Operate

View/Operate CAM10 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM11 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM12 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM13 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM14 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM15 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM16 View/Operate

Recording

Event

Schedule

^M1^aintenance

SETUP MENU

Basic Setup

ON JUN

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

LIVE

OFF

Switcher

Display

Comm

System

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

■

ON JUN

Time Format

OFF

■

OFF

Time

Date

JAN

10 10 10

SET

User Regist.

User Edit

SET

OFF

ON JUN

10 :00

Auto Adjust Time

■

OFF

MASTER Time

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

ON -- --

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

6■

■

OFF

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

ON JUN

OFF

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

ON JUN

OFF

● User Name

CANCEL

Enter 4-14 alphanumeric characters for a user name.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete char-

acters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to

page 54.

x Move the cursor to enter the ON or OFF time (year,

month, date) for summer time using the arrows button.

● Password

[Screenshot 3]

Enter 4-8 alphanumeric characters for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete char-

acters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to

page 54.

The cursor will move to the selected cell for entry of the ON

or OFF time for summer time.

Recording

Event

Schedule

^M1^aintenance

SETUP MENU

ON JUN

LIVE

OFF

Switcher

Display

Comm

System

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

Basic Setup

■

ON JUN

Time Format

OFF

■

OFF

Important:

Time

Date

JAN

10 10 10

User Regist.

User Edit

SET

OFF

ON JUN

10 :00

Auto Adjust Time

■

• Set unique password, not something that would be eas-

ily guessed by a third person. Password also should be

memorable.

• Password of an administrator should be changed peri-

odically in order to enhance the security.

OFF

MASTER Time

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

ON -- --

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

6■

■

OFF

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

ON JUN

OFF

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

ON JUN

OFF

CANCEL

● Level

c Rotate the jog dial to enter the ON or OFF time (year,

month, date) for summer time.

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions in each level is described in

"User Level" (Refer to page 124).

LV1/LV2/LV3

v Move the cursor to "OK" and press the SET button.

→ The ON and OFF time for summer time will be

applied and the "Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

Table" will be closed.

● Priority

Assign priority (1 (lowest) to 16 (highest)) to users.

Notes:

● Default Screen

Select a camera image to be displayed during the login

procedure from the following.

CAM1 - 16: Displays an image from the selected camera

channel.

QUAD1 - 4: Displays images from the camera channels 1 -

4 on a 4-split screen.

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4

and press the SET button, the setting will be can-

celed and the "Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

Table" will be closed.

• The settings for summer time will not be applied

until the SET button is pressed after moving the cur-

sor to "OK" in the step 4.

QUAD5 - 8: Displays images from the camera channels 5 -

8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 - 12: Displays images from the camera channels 9

- 12 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD13 - 16: Displays images from the camera channels

13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

7 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera channels 1 -

7 on a 7-split screen.

9 SCREEN 1 - 9: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

e [User Registration] Registration of user who

operates this unit

word.

After filling out the user information, move the cursor to

"SET" at the lower right of the menu and press the SET

button to complete registration.

9 SCREEN 10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays

images from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split

screen.

122

10 SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays images

from the camera channels 1 - 10 on a 10-split screen.

13 SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays images

from the camera channels 1 - 13 on a 13-split screen.

16 SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays images

from the camera channels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

SEQ: Images will be displayed in the sequential display.

y [Host Registration] Registration of PC (host)

accessible to this unit

unit via a network such as a LAN.

Move the cursor to "SET" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete registration.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

● Camera Partitioning

Select a controllable range for each camera channel from

the following.

View/Operate: Displaying live images and operating cam-

era are possible.

Host IP Address

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

■

000

LV1

000

Basic Setup

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

CAM9

View/Operate

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

View/Operate CAM10 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM11 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM12 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM13 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM14 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM15 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM16 View/Operate

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

View: Displaying live images is possible but cameras can-

not be operated.

SET

--: Both displaying live images and operating the camera

are impossible.

● Host IP Address

Enter the IP address. Move the cursor to "Host IP Address"

and rotate the jog dial to enter the IP address. For this unit,

enter 4 units from the decimal numbers (0-254).

r [User Edit] Correction of registered user infor-

mation

It is possible to edit registered user information.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial

to select the user name.

Registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way as registra-

tion. (Refer to page 122.)

Notes:

• Entering "*" validates all numbers.

• It is impossible to register "0.0.0.0".

● Level

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions for each level is described in

"User Level" (Refer to page 124).

LV1/LV2/LV3

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete editing.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

User Name

■

Basic Setup

● Priority

Time

Date

User Password

User Regist.

User Edit

LV1

16 SCREEN

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

■

Assign priority (1 (lowest) to 16 (highest)) to hosts.

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

CAM9

View

View/Operate CAM10

View/Operate CAM11

View/Operate CAM12

View/Operate CAM13

View/Operate CAM14

View/Operate CAM15

View/Operate CAM16

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

● Default Screen

Select a startup display to be displayed after login from the

following.

EDIT

CAM 1-16 (for the WJ-HD316)/CAM 1-9 (for the WJ-

HD309): Displays live images from the selected camera

channel on a single screen.

t [User Delete] Deletion of registered user

It is possible to delete a registered user.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial

to select the user name. Move the cursor to "DELETE"

and press the SET button.

QUAD 1-4: Displays live images from the camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD 5-8: Displays live images from the camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

The selected user will be deleted.

QUAD 9-12 (for the WJ-HD316)/CAM 9 (for the WJ-

HD309): Displays live images from the camera chan-

nels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen. (When the WJ-HD309 is

used, live images from only camera channel 9 will be

displayed on the upper left screen of a 4-split screen.)

QUAD 13-16 (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays live

images from the camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split

screen.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Basic Setup

LIVE

User Name

■

Time

Date

DELETE

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

9 SCREEN 1-9: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9 SCREEN 10-16 (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays

images from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split

screen.

123

16 SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316): Displays images on

a 16-split screen.

SEQ: Images will be displayed in the sequential display.

o [User Level] Setting of operation level

Set operable functions at each user level (LV 1/LV 2/

LV 3).

Rotate the jog dial to display "b" to enable operation.

Leave it blank to disable operation.

Refer to the table below for each function.

● Camera Partitioning

Select a controllable range for each camera channel from

the following.

View/Operate: Displaying live images and operating cam-

era are possible.

View: Displaying live images is possible but cameras can-

not be operated.

--: Both displaying live images and operating camera are

impossible.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

SChedule

System

SETUP MENU

Basic Setup

LIVE

LV1 LV2 LV3

Time

Date

WJ-HD300 Setup

WJ-HD300 Setup Status

Camera Setup

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

Alarm Reset

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

u [Host Edit] Correction of registered host infor-

mation

It is possible to edit registered host information.

Move the cursor to "Host IP Address" and rotate the jog

dial to select the host IP address.

Registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way as registra-

tion. (Refer to page 123.)

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete editing.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Host IP Address

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

■

000

LV1

000

Basic Setup

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

16 SCREEN

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

CAM9

View

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

View/Operate CAM10

View/Operate CAM11

View/Operate CAM12

View/Operate CAM13

View/Operate CAM14

View/Operate CAM15

View/Operate CAM16

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

EDIT

i [Host Delete] Deletion of registered host

It is possible to delete a registered host.

Move the cursor to "Host Delete" and rotate the jog dial

to select the host. Move the cursor to "DELETE" and

press the SET button.

The selected host will be deleted.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

Host IP Address

■

0. 0. 0. 0

DELETE

Time

Date Setup

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

124

● Functions that can be enabled/disabled

The following functions can be enabled/disabled according to the user level.

Function

Description

WJ-HD300 Setup

WJ-HD300 Setup Status

Camera Setup

The SETUP MENU is displayed and the settings can be performed.

Only the SETUP MENU can be displayed. The settings cannot be performed.

The setting menu of the camera is displayed and the settings can be performed.

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the event log. (Refer to page

95.) You also can refer to the network log. Refer to the Network Operating

Instructions (PDF) for further information.

Event Log Status

Error Log Status

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the error log. (Refer to page 95.)

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the access log. (Refer to page

96.)

Access Log Status

Alarm Reset

An event operation can be canceled. (Refer to page 47.)

An event operation can be suppressed. (Refer to page 47.)

A recorded image can be manually copied. (Refer to page 48.)

Image data in the normal recording area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Image data in the event recording area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Manual recording can be started and stopped.

Alarm Suspend

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

A recorded image can be played.

This unit can be logged into from a PC via a network.

! [Save/Load] Saving and loading of settings of

the SETUP MENU

It is possible to save the settings of the SETUP MENU in

this unit.

It is also possible to call up saved settings. (Load)

Move the cursor to "SAVE" or "LOAD" and press the SET

button.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Basic Setup

LIVE

User Setup Save

User Setup Load

■

SAVE

LOAD

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

125

DISPLAY SETUP MENU OF CAMERA

For operating the camera connected to this unit, it is necessary to set the camera function in advance.

Setup of camera function can be performed on the setup menu of the connected camera.

You can operate the camera setup menu by calling up it from this unit. Contents of the camera setting menu and operations

vary according to the connected cameras. For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the camera.

The following is the descriptions of how to display the camera setting menu.

z Press the camera selection button for a desired camera channel and the SET button simultaneously.

→The camera setup menu will be displayed.

Use the following buttons on the front panel to perform the settings of the camera setup menu.

To move the cursor

Arrows button (CD)

To change the selected parameter

Arrows button (AB)

To determine the selected parameter

To display the submenu

SET button

To return to the previous menu

SETUP/ESC button

x Press any one of the PAN/TILT button, the ZOOM/FOCUS button, the IRIS button and the PRESET/AUTO button to com-

plete the camera setting.

Note: To display the special menu of the camera setup menu, press the camera selection button 2 after moving the cursor

to SPECIAL on the camera setup menu.

To reset the settings of the camera setup menu to the default settings, press the camera selection button 3 after mov-

ing the cursor to CAMERA RESET on the special menu.

Depending on models of the connected cameras, operation method and menu items are different. Refer to the operat-

ing instructions of the connected camera.

126

DISK MANAGEMENT

■ Notes on hard disk

Camera images are recorded into the built-in hard disk of

■ How to replace the built-in hard

disk

this unit.

It is possible to replace the hard disk drive regardless of

whether the power of the unit is on/off.

However, the procedures for replacement are different.

Refer to the operating instructions for the optional extension

unit when replacing the hard disk in the extension unit.

There are two hard disks in this unit. In case one of them

malfunctions during recording, it is possible to keep record-

ing with the other hard disk (mirror function).

The internal hard disk of this unit is virtually divided into

areas 4 to manage the hard disk.

Normal recording area: An area into which images are

recorded at times other than an event occurrence such

as manual recording.

Event recording area: An area into which images are

recorded at an event occurrence.

Copy area: An area into which copy data is stored.

Pre-recording area: An area into which pre-recording

images are recorded.

When replacing the hard disk drive after turn-

ing off the power of the unit.

z Turn off the power of the unit and detach the power

plug from the outlet.

x Do the following to replace the hard disk drive.

1. Open the connectors cover on the front panel and

remove the fixing screws.

It is possible to check the available disk space for each

area on "Disk Info" of "Maintenance" on the SETUP MENU.

(Refer to page 93.)

Operations for the hard disk drive such as initialization (for-

matting) of the hard disk drive in the unit or the optional

extension unit, or mirroring, etc., can be performed in the

"HDD DISK MENU". (Refer to page 130.)

Detach the front panel by sliding it after removing the

screws.

Note: It is necessary to create either the normal recording

area or the event record area. If the normal recording

area is not created, manual recording images and

schedule recording images are recorded into the event

recording area. If the event recording area is not creat-

ed, event recording images and emergency recording

images are recorded into the normal recording area.

Screw

Terminal cover

Important:

• Do not detach the cable connecting the unit and the

front panel while the HDD status indicators are still lit or

until 30 seconds have passed since the HDD status

indicators went off.

• Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

• Do not stack them, or keep them upright.

• Do not use an electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 kgf · cm))

• Avoid rapid changes in the temperature/humidity to

prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: within 15

°C/h (59 °F/h))

• Set all the hard disk drives as master using the jumper

pin.

127

2. Remove the cable from the front panel.

5. Remove the connector from the hard disk drive first,

and then remove the hard disk drive from the hard disk

mounting bracket.

Jumper pin

Front panel

connector

Connector

SSD

3. Remove the screws fixing the mounting unit, and then

pull the mounting bracket toward you.

Hard disk

replacement label

6. Install the new hard disk drive in the reverse order of

detaching the hard disk drive.

Important:

Screws

• When installing, confirm that there are no dust around

the connectors. Adhesion of dust may cause malfunc-

tion.

4. Remove the screws fixing the hard disk drive.

First, remove the four screws fixing the upper side of

the hard disk drive while holding the bottom side of the

hard disk drive to prevent the hard disk from falling.

Then, remove the four screws fixing the lower side of

the hard disk drive.

• Set the hard disk as master using the jumper pin.

c After replacing the hard disk drive, insert the power

plug into the outlet and turn the power of the unit.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automati-

cally after the restart.

Screws

(totally 8 pieces)

Hard disk

mounting angle

SSD

Hard disk

replacement label

128

When replacing the hard disk drive without

turning off the power of the unit.

● When replacing the built-in hard disk of the

extension unit

With displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window, start

replacing the built-in hard disk of the optional extension

unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the optional extension

unit for the descriptions of how to replace the hard disk.

z Close the SETUP MENU after selecting "ON" for "HDD

Safety Mode" of "Disk Info" on the "Maintenance" menu.

→ The HDD SAFETY MODE window will be displayed.

c After completing the replacement of the hard disk,

move the cursor to "OFF" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

→ The unit will restart and the HDD DISK MENU will be

displayed automatically.

v Perform the settings for the disk according to your

x The procedures are different between the replacement

of the hard disk of the unit and the replacement of the

hard disk of the optional extension unit.

needs. Refer to page 132 for further information.

When replacing the built-in hard disk of the unit

Move the cursor to "REMOVE" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

The "REMOVE" indication will change to "REMOVING".

The power supply to the front panel will be cut and the unit

will be unable to operate with the front panel.

Detach the cable from the front panel and start replacing

the built-in hard disk.

Start from step 2 on page 127 to replace the built-in hard

disk.

Important:

Detach the cable from the front panel after confirming

that "REMOVING" is displayed. Otherwise, it may cause

malfunction.

The "REMOVING" indication will return to "REMOVE" by

attaching the cable to the front panel. The power will be

supplied to the front panel and the unit will be enabled to

operate with the front panel.

129

■ About the HDD DISK MENU

The operations regarding the hard disk can be performed by displaying the "HDD DISK MENU" on monitor 2.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed when the SET button is pressed while displaying the system check complete window.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will also be displayed automatically after replacing or removing the hard disk.

The following operations can be performed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Setting item

FORMAT

Description

Page

132

Formats (initializes) the hard disk. It can also change the setting values for

the recording area respectively. Mirroring can also be started on this menu.

MIRROR ON

MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

Recovers the mirrored hard disk.

Cancels mirroring.

137

138

–

Removes the hard disk drive from the system logically.

Restarts this unit.

Closes the "HDD DISK MENU".

–

■ Display of the HDD DISK MENU

Information of the hard disk drive of the unit or the optional extension unit will be displayed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Main unit/optional extension unit

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

Information about hard disk located in the main unit and optional exten-

sion unit

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

160 GB: Indicates the hard disk capacity (disk existed

when last started up)

ERROR: Indicates that the hard disk has failed to be initial-

ized.

160 GB M: Indicates the hard disk capacity (mirrored disk

existed when last started up)

Important:

ADD (160 GB): Indicates that this hard disk is newly mount-

ed at this startup, but that it was not mounted last time.

Those parenthesized numbers indicate the capacity of

the hard disk.

• It is impossible to operate the unit when there is a hard

disk with indications of * (capacity), * (ERROR), LOST

or ERROR. In this case, remove the relevant hard disk.

(Refer to page 138.)

ADD (ERROR): Indicates that this hard disk is newly

mounted at this startup, but that it was not mounted last

time. Then, an error is detected on the hard disk.

* (160 GB): Indicates that a different hard disk from the one

that existed at the last startup is mounted. Those paren-

thesized numbers indicate the capacity of the hard

disk.

* (ERROR): Indicates that a different hard disk from the one

that existed at the last startup is mounted, and an error

has been detected on the hard disk.

• Hard disks with ADD (capacity) indication are not initial-

ized yet.

First, initialize them. It is impossible to record images on

it or to use it as a copy destination without initialization.

Note: The displayed available disk space on this menu will

not include the space required for data management.

Therefore, the understated available disk space will be

displayed.

It is possible to display information about the recording

area (allocated disk size for normal recording area,

event recording area, copy area) by pressing the

SETUP/ESC button while displaying the "TOP MENU" of

the "HDD DISK MENU".

LOST: Indicates that a position where a hard disk was

mounted at the last startup has no hard disk.

–: Indicates that a hard disk is not mounted this time nor at

the last startup.

130

■ RAID 5 Function of the Extension Unit

Summary of the RAID 5 function (Redundant

Arrays for Independent Disks, independent

data disks with distributed parity blocks)

● Setup/cancel the RAID 5 function

Do the following to set or cancel the RAID 5 function with an

optional extension unit.

Refer to the operating instruction of the extension unit for

further information.

It is possible to use the RAID 5 function with an optional

extension unit.

RAID level 5 regards 3 or more drives as one drive, and it is

possible to read data by attaching error correction data

even though one of the drives is broken automatically. (It is

impossible to read data if 2 or more drives are broken.)

RAID level 5 requires a minimum of 3 drives to implement.

When using the RAID function, logical disk size of the

extension unit will be as below.

z Make sure that the power of this unit and all of the

extension units to be connected are OFF.

x To set the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of the

extension unit to "RAID 5".

To cancel the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of

the extension unit to "SINGLE".

Logical disk size = Smallest size of the disk among the

disks in the extension unit x (Number of the disks in the

extension unit - 1)

c Make sure that the HDD POWER switch of the extension

unit is "ON".

Important:

v Turn the power of the extension unit on.

• When connecting two extension units or more with this

unit, it is impossible to connect the extension unit with

the RAID 5 function and the one without the RAID 5

function at the same time.

• When the RAID 5 function is used, it is impossible to

use two hard disks in this unit. The recorded pictures in

those disks will not be deleted.

b Turn the power of this unit on.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automati-

cally after the system check when the hard disk

configuration has been changed such as when an

extension unit is newly connected.

Important:

• When the RAID 5 function is set or canceled, all data on

each hard disk of the extension unit will be deleted.

• When turning the power on, turn the power of the exten-

sion unit first, and then turn the power of this unit on.

Otherwise, the extension unit may not work correctly.

131

v Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

■ Formatting (Initialization) the

Hard Disk

It is necessary to initialize the hard disk in the following

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309) are available to

enter numbers for password.

cases.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 54.

• When replacing the hard disk of this unit

• When operating the unit for the first time after connect-

ing the optional extension unit to this unit

b Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

Important:

(CD) and press the SET button.

When the hard disk is formatted (initialized), all of the

recorded images will be deleted.

[Screenshot 3]

The "THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu will be dis-

played.

● Formatting (initialization) all hard

disks (unit)

All hard disks including the built-in hard disks and the hard

disks in the extension units will be initialized. All units will be

initialized when the RAID 5 function is set.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

MAIN 160GB M

160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

z Turn on the power of any peripheral devices such as

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

extension unit connected to this unit.

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

x Turn on the power of this unit and press the SET button

after completing the system check.

n Move the cursor to "ALL UNITS" using the arrows button

(AB) and press the SET button.

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

Select "ALL UNITS" when using the RAID 5 function.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

[Screenshot 1]

ALL UNIT ONE UNIT

MAIN

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

EXT7 480GB

EXT6 480GB

EXT5 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT3 ADD (480GB)

EXT2 480GB

EXT1 LOST

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[Screenshot 4]

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

The "RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISKS" will be dis-

played.

c Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

^DW^igitaJ^l-HD300

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISK

Normal area

90GB

Event area

1800GB

Copy area

450GB

Free area

450GB

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

HDD Total capacity : 2790GB

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

m Select a recording area using the arrows button (A B)

and rotate the jog dial to set the capacity for the select-

ed recording area.

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Repeat this operation to set the capacity for the other

recording areas.

132

, Press the SET button after setting.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

[Screenshot 5]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

Disk Recorder

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

^DW^igitaJ^l-HD300

HDD DISK MENU

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISK

Enter the password.

160GB

Normal area

90GB

Event area

Copy area

Free area

450GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE

160GB

CANCEL

Starting format of all HDDs,

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

1800GB

450GB

and all of data in HDDs

are going to be erased.

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

HDD Total capacity : 2790GB

EXECUTE CANCEL

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

v Rotate the jog dial to enter the password for an admin-

istrator.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309) are available to

enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 54.

. Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

→ Formatting will start and the format result dialog

window will be displayed. The "TOP MENU" of the

"HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automatically

after displaying the format result dialog window.

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D)

● Formatting (initialization) the

and press the SET button.

selected hard disk (unit)

Do the following to format the selected hard disk (the

selected unit when using the RAID 5 function).

[Screenshot 3]

The "THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu will be dis-

played.

z Turn on the power of any peripheral devices such as an

extension unit connected to this unit.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

x Turn on the power of this unit.

MAIN 160GB M

160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

The image saying the system check has been complet-

ed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played automatically.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL UNIT

ONE UNIT

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

MAIN

EXT7 480GB

EXT6 480GB

EXT5 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT3 ADD (480GB)

EXT2 480GB

EXT1 LOST

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

n Move the cursor to "SELECTED DISK" using the arrows

button (A B) and press the SET button.

When using the RAID 5 function, select "ONE UNIT" on

"THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu.

c Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

133

, Select a setting method for each recording area from

the following using the arrows button (A B) and press

the SET button.

[Screenshot 4]

The "DISK SELECT" menu will be displayed.

When using the RAID 5 function, the "UNIT SELECTION"

menu will be displayed.

Auto Setup: Assigns the same proportion for each

recording area as the proportion of the existing

hard disks. (→ step 9)

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

All Copy Area: Sets the whole selected hard disk (unit)

WJ-HD300

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT DISK SELECT

Select HDD to be formatted,and press [SET]key.

as the copy area. (→ step 9)

160GB M

160GB

160GB M

160GB

MAIN

EXT7

All Pre REC Area: Sets the whole selected hard disk

(unit) as the pre-recording area. (→ step 10)

Detailed Setup: Sets each recording area individually.

(→ step 11)

160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Important:

When the built-in hard disk of this unit is selected, "All

Pre REC Area" is not available.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT UNIT SELECTION

Select HDD to be formatted,and press [SET] key.

MAIN

EXT7

[Screenshot 6]

The confirmation menu of the set recording area will be dis-

played.

480GB

EXT6 480GB

EXT5 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT3 ADD (480GB)

EXT2 480GB

EXT1 LOST

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

DISK SETTING METHOD

AUTO SETUP

Normal area

10GB

Event area

80GB

Copy area

35GB

Free area

35GB

m Move the cursor to a desired hard disk (unit) to be for-

matted (initialized) using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

HDD Total capacity:160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

[Screenshot 5]

"THE SETTING METHOD" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

DISK SETTING METHOD

ALL COPY AREA

WJ-HD300

DISK SELECT

THE SETTING METHOD

Auto Setup All Copy Area All Pre REC Area Detailed Setup

160GB M

160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

Normal area

0GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

160GB

Free area

0GB

MAIN

EXT7

160GB M

160GB

HDD Total capacity:160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

DISK SELECT THE SETTING METHOD

WJ-HD300

Auto Setup All Copy Area All Pre REC Area Detailed Setup

. Confirm the capacity of the set recording area and

press the SET button.

MAIN

EXT7

480GB

EXT6 480GB

→ The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

(→ step 13)

EXT5 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT3 ADD (480GB)

EXT2 480GB

EXT1 LOST

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

134

[Screenshot 7]

[Screenshot 9]

The "PRE RECORDING AREAS" menu will be displayed.

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

DISK SETTING METHOD

PRE RECORDING AREAS

WJ-HD300

DISK SETTING METHOD

DETAILED SETUP

1CH

0GB

2CH

0GB

3CH

0GB

4CH

0GB

5CH

0GB

6CH

0GB

7CH

0GB

8CH

0GB

Normal area

110GB

Event area

Copy area Free area

Starting one (1) disk formatting.

0GB 0GB 30GB

All of contents in the disk is erased.

9CH

0GB

10CH

0GB

11CH

0GB

12CH

0GB

13CH

0GB

14CH

0GB

15CH

0GB

16CH

0GB

FREE

0GB

EXECUTE

CANCEL

HDD Total capacity:160GB

HDD CAPACITY:160GB

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

⁄ Select the camera channel for pre-recording using the

arrows button and assign the disk space to the select-

ed pre-recording area by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or

more camera channels.

⁄ Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

→ Formatting will start and the "TOP MENU" of the

"HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Press the SET button after setting.

→ The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

(→ step 13)

Important:

It is impossible to select the camera channel to which

the pre-recording area on another hard disk (unit) is

already assigned.

[Screenshot 8]

The "DETAILED SETUP" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

DISK SETTING METHOD

DETAILED SETUP

Normal area

110GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

0GB

Free area

50GB

HDD Total capacity:160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

⁄ Select the recording area using the arrows button and

assign the disk space to the selected recording area by

rotating the jog dial.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or

more recording areas.

Press the SET button after setting.

⁄ Press the SET button after setting.

135

■ Setting for Mirroring

Mirroring is the function that records camera images onto

two hard disks simultaneously. In case one hard disk has a

problem, image data will be stored on the other hard disk.

The credibility of disk can be enhanced.

It is recommended to activate the mirroring function for the

first use of this unit.

When the mirroring function is activated with remaining

recorded images in the hard disk, those recorded images

in the hard disk will be deleted.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Important:

• The mirroring function can be configured only by two of

the built-in hard disks.

• The size of the two hard disks used for the mirroring

function must be the same.

• When using the RAID 5 function, it is impossible to acti-

vate the mirroring function.

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309) are available to

enter numbers for the password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 54.

● Start mirroring

Do the following to activate the mirroring function.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

z Turn on the power of this unit.

(CD) and press the SET button.

The image saying the system check has been complet-

ed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

MAIN 160GB M

160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

b Move the cursor to "MIRROR FORMAT" using the

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

arrows button (CD) and press the SET button.

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

[Screenshot 4]

The "MIRROR AREA SETUP" menu will be displayed.

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

DISK SETTING METHOD

MIRROR AREA SETUP

x Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

Normal area

10GB

Event area

90GB

Copy area

30GB

Free area

30GB

(A B) and press the SET button.

HDD Total capacity:160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

136

n Select a recording area using the arrows button and

assign the disk space to the selected recording area by

rotating the jog dial.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or

more recording areas.

Press the SET button after setting.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

m Press the SET button after setting.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[Screenshot 5]

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

, Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309) are available to

enter numbers for password.

→ Mirroring will start and the "TOP MENU" of the "HDD

DISK MENU" will be displayed.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 54.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

DISK CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

MIRROR AREA SETUP

Normal area

110GB

Event area

Copy area

Free area

Starting mirror format of HDDs

00GB

30GB

in main unit, and all of data

in HDDs are going to be erased.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

EXECUTE

CANCEL

HDD Total capacity:160GB

(CD) and press the SET button.

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

● Cancel mirroring (MIRROR OFF)

Do the following to cancel the mirroring function.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Mirror "OFF" in main unit.

160GB

z Turn on the power of this unit.

The image saying the system check has been complet-

ed will be displayed.

CANCEL

*(ERROR)

160GB

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (A B)

and press the SET button.

→ Mirroring will be canceled.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

Note: One of the two hard disks involved in mirroring

will be indicated as "* (capacity)" on the "TOP

MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" after canceling the

mirroring function.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

● Hard disk recovery (MIRROR ON)

160GB

Do the following to recover the hard disk when one of the

hard disks involved in mirroring is damaged while mirroring,

or when one of the hard disks is replaced.

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

z Turn on the power of this unit.

The image saying the system check has been complet-

ed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

x Move the cursor to "MIRROR OFF" using the arrows but-

ton (A B) and press the SET button.

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

137

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (A B)

and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

→ Recovery of the hard disk will start when the unit is

in operation after the "HDD DISK MENU" is closed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

● Remove the Hard Disk Logically and

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

Reconfigure it (REMOVE)

160GB

*(ERROR)

It is possible to remove the hard disk logically (unmount)

without uninstalling (detaching) the hard disk physically. It

is recommended to remove the hard disk logically when the

hard disk of the unit or an extension unit is having trouble

(hard disk indicated with "*", "LOST" or "ERROR") and it is

necessary to remove it temporarily but not to stop opera-

tion.

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

x Move the cursor to "MIRROR ON" using the arrows but-

ton (A B) and press the SET button.

Do the following to remove the hard disk logically.

Note: When it is impossible to recover the hard disk

(mirror on) such in case that the hard disk size to be

recovered is too small, it is impossible to select

"MIRROR ON".

z Turn on the power of this unit.

The image saying the system check has been complet-

ed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

160GB

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309) are available to

enter numbers for password.

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 55.

x Move the cursor to "REMOVE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

(CD) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

160GB

*(ERROR)

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

MAIN 160GB M

EXT7 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT5 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

"ON" in m16

Bnit.

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

160GB

CANCEL

*(ERROR)

160GB

EXT3 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT1 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

138

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309) are available to

enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 54.

→ The hard disk will be removed logically and the

confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed after logi-

cal remove of the hard disk is started.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU REMOVING

HDD DISK MENU

REMOVING

MAIN: REMOVED OK

EXT7–1 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–1 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–2 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–3 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–4 : REMOVED OK

EXT5–3 : REMOVED OK

EXT2–2 : REMOVED OK

EXT2–1 : REMOVED OK

EXT1–4 : REMOVED OK

v The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played when logical remove has been completed.

139

SERIAL (RS232C) CONNECTOR COMMAND REFERENCE

■ SERIAL (RS232C) Communication Protocol

With the SERIAL (RS232C) interface, you can control functions of this unit by transferring the specified commands from a per-

sonal computer (PC) to this unit.

Notes:

• This unit does not support the communication converted between the SERIAL (RS232C) and USB interface.

• When controlling the unit with the SERIAL (RS232C) interface, the following parameters should be identical between the

communication devices.

The setting is available in "SETUP MENU" – "Comm" – " SERIAL (RS232C) Setting".

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

■ Command Format

The following pages detail how to write the commands.

1. The following details how to write the commands

Code

ASCII

[STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p] [ETX]

(02H) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – (03H)

STX: This shows the data start. STX (ASCII code: 02h) is always prefixed to data. h shows hexadecimal digit.

Transmission command: A command shown in the Command List is designated.

ETX: This shows the data end. ETX (ASCII code: 03h) is always prefixed to data.

The character code is ASCII.

When a command needs parameter, colon (:) is used for dividing the command and parameter. The following is how to

write the commands when two or more commands are specified.

Code

[STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p1] : [p2] [ETX]

2. Response Command (from the Unit to the PC)

The unit sends back the response command for the transmission command from the PC.

• When the reception was completed successfully

The response command differs between when an ANSWER command (sending back the status or data) is required or

when not required.

• When no ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the same identifier as that in the transmission command, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

Same identifier

140

• When an ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the status or data, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

QOP

[ETX]

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

Status inquiry command

Status information command

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

QRV

[ETX]

[STX]

QRV:1.01:1.01:1.00:1.10 [ETX]

Version inquiry command

Sends back data.

• About ACK code

After receiving an command from the PC, the unit sends back the ACK code to the PC in 20 ms or less.

[ACK] = Reception succeeded (ASCII code: 06H)

After the ACK code sending back and the command processing has completed, the unit sends back the response com-

mand to the PC.

Example:

These are examples for the following operations.

1. Login with the user name of "ADMIN" and with password of "12345".

2. Display images from the camera channel 1 on the monitor 2.

3. Start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

4. Logout

(1) (This unit -> PC) Login

[STX]AD001;OLI:ADMIN[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]:12345[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP][ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start the login procession of the user name of "ADMIN".

(2) (This unit -> PC) Response against (1).

[STX]AD001;OLI:1[ETX]

(3) (PC -> This unit) Select the monitor 2

[STX]AD001;OMS:001[ETX]

(4) (This unit -> PC) Response against (3).

[STX]AD001;OLI:1[ETX]

(5) (PC -> This unit) Display images from the camera channel 1.

[STX]AD001;OCS:00001[ETX]

(6) (This unit - > PC) Response against (5).

[STX]AD001;OCS:00002[ETX]

(7) (PC -> This unit) Playback from the designated time point.

[STX]AD001;ZTP:20030101150000[ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

(8) (This unit - > PC) Response against (7).

[STX]AD001;ZTP: 200301011500000[ETX]

141

(9) (PC -> This unit) Logout.

[STX]AD001;OLO [ETX]

When receiving the command above, the user logged in via SERIAL (RS232C) (ADMIN) will logout.

(10)(This unit - > PC) Response against (9).

[STX]AD001;OLO[ETX]

Note: The character code of [STX], [ETX] and [SP] are as follows.

[STX]: 02h

[ETX]: 03h

[SP] (space): 20h

3. Reception Error

The response command differs between the reception error and parameter error.

• Communication error (Reception error)

When the unit cannot properly receive the command due to the communication error, the unit immediately sends back the

NACK code to the PC. After clearing the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX]

command.

[NCK] = Reception failed (ASCII code: 15H)

Reason for the communication error

1: Parity error (ASCII code: 31H)

2: Framing error (ASCII code: 33H)

3: Overrun error (ASCII code: 34H)

• Parameter error

When the unit cannot properly process the received command, the unit sends back an error code to the PC. After clearing

the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX] command.

[ETX]

=Error

Reason for the error

001: Command invalid (There is no associated command.)

002: Parameter invalid (The number, digit, or range of the command

parameters is incorrect.)

003: Command invalid (The unit does not support the operation mode.)

E: Command error (ASCII code: 45H)

• If the unit receives another command during the response, the unit will respond to the command after processing the cur-

rent response.

• If the unit received the [STX] command again before receiving the [ETX] command, the unit will clear the internal buffer.

Then, the unit will process the data following to the [STX] command. (The commands received before the second [STX]

command will be canceled.)

• The internal buffer will be cleared when it fills up.*

142

4. PC Connection Example

RS232C crossing cable is used for connection between the unit and PC. (Refer to the following page for cable specification.)

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Personal compute

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

WJ-HD316 Rear View

Pin No. Signal Name

I/O

Cross cable connection example

TXD

RXD

DTR

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

OUT

–

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

DSR

RTS

CTS

WJ-HD316

PC or another device

OUT

143

● Command Table

Basic Operation

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Forward a field

Rewind a field

Pause during playback

Play

Manual recording

Manual recording with

text

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

ORC

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

ORC

ZMR:nn

...

ZMR:nn:ddd ddd

nn=01~99 (Sequence number)

...

ddd ddd: text (200 bytes or less)

Stop

OSP:n

OSP

OSF

n=P: Stops PLAY

n=R: Stops REC

no parameter stops PLAY and REC

n=0F Normal speed

n=1F x2 speed

Skip & play forward

OSF:n

n=2F x5 speed

n=3F x10 speed

n=4F x20 speed

n=5F x50 speed

n=6F x100 speed

n=0S Normal speed

n=1S 1/2 speed

Skip&play reversely

OSR:n

OSR

n=0F Normal speed

n=1F x2 speed

n=2F x5 speed

n=3F x10 speed

n=4F x20 speed

n=5F x50 speed

n=6F x100 speed

n=0S Normal speed

n=1S 1/2 speed

Record No. Search and

playback

Time & date search and

playback

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:mm

ZTP:yyyymmddhhnnss

OSK:dnn

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZTP:yyyymmddhhnnss

OSK

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr Record No.

yyyymmddhhnnss:Time & date of playback

image

d=+ Forward

Record skip

– Backward

nn=01 Number of skipped records: Fixed

LISTED Playback

ZLT:n

ZPM

ZLT:n

n=0 OFF

n=1 ON

Playback latest image

A - B repeat playback

ZPM

ZRP:n

ZRP:n:yyyymmddhhnnss

n=0 A - B repeat playback OFF

n=1 Set repeat start point (A point)

n=2 Set repeat end point (B point)

yyyymmddhhnnss: Date and time of A/B point

n=0 COPY SETUP MENU OFF

n=1 COPY SETUP MENU ON

n=0 Text display OFF

n=1 Text display ON

Display COPY SETUP

Display text

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

Multi-screen switching

m=0 4-split screen

m=1 7-split screen

m=2 9-split screen

m=3 10-split screen

m=4 13-split screen

m=5 16-split screen

nnnn=0001 Select MON 1

nnnn=0002 Select MON 2

Monitor selection

Camera selection

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

ccccc: Camera CH

144

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Electronic zooming

OZM:m

OZM:n

m=0 Electronic zooming OFF

m=1 Electronic zooming ON

m=> Switch x2 -> x4

m=< Switch x4 -> x2

m=+ Switch Electronic zooming OFF -> x2 ->

x4 -> Electronic zooming OFF -> ...

m=- Switch x4 -> x2 -> Electronic zooming OFF

-> x4 -> ...

n=0 Electronic zooming OFF

n=2 x2

n=4 x4 term

Start sequence

Stop sequence

Disk selection

OQT:01F

OQS:0

ZDS:k

OQT:01F:01

OQS

ZDS:k

k=0 HDD normal/event recording sector

k=1 HDD copy sector

k=2 Disk connected to COPY 1

k=3 Disk connected to COPY 2)

Marking

ZMP

Alarm Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Alarm input

OAI:b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄

OAI

b₁b₂b₃: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Alarm CH information (binary)

Alarm input with text

ZAI:b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄:

nn:ddd ddd

ZAI:nn

b₁b₂b₃: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Alarm CH information (binary)

nn=01 - 99 (Sequence No)

...

ddd ddd: text (200 bytes or less)

Alarm reset

OAL;n

MAD:n

–

OAL

n=0 Alarm all reset

n=1 Alarm reset

n=0 Alarm suspension OFF

n=1 Alarm suspension ON)

n=0 LED OFF

n=1 LED ON

Alarm suspension

MAD:n

ALD:n

Alarm change information

(LED indication)

n=2 LED Blinking

Alarm change information

–

ALM: b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄

b1b2b3: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a1a2a3a4: Alarm CH information (binary)

Setup Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Display SETUP MENU

MSU:n

n=0 SETUP MENU OFF

n=1 SETUP MENU ON

Move cursor

DCR:n1n2

DCR

n1n2=A1 Right

n1n2=C1 Upward

n1n2=E1 Left

n1n2=G1 Downward

n1n2=+1 Increment parameter (+)

n1n2=-1 Decrement parameter (–)

n1n2=PD Move to virtual menu (SET)

n1n2=P- Go back to an older page (BACK)

n1n2=PU Move to upper layer (ESC)

Date & Time setup

Summer time setup

Recording mode setup

TSU:yyyymmddhhnn

MST:n

MRM:n

TSU

MST

MRM

yyyymmddhhnn: Date and time

n=0 Standard time n=1 Summer time

n=0 Normal recording mode

n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording

mode

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

OLI:uuu...uuu:

ppp ppp

OLI:n

uuu...uuu: User name (32-byte fixed length)

ppp...ppp: Password (32-byte fixed length)

n=0 Error in user name/password

n=1 Login succeeded

...

n=2 Login failed

Logout

OLO

145

Data Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Copy by specifying

record

ZCR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:m

ZCR

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Copy by specifying date ZCT:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

ZCT

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁: Start date & time of

data copy

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂: End date & time of

data copy

& time

h₁h₁n₁n₁:y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂:s:ccc:m

s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Data copy completed

–

ZEC:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

h₁h₁n₁n₁:

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n1 Start date & time of

data copy

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂

n₂n₂:s:ccc:m

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂End date & time of

data copy

s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Cancel data copy

Erase log

ZDC

ZLC:k

ZDC

ZLC:k

k=1 Event input log

k=2 Trouble log

k=3 Access log

Log data total number

inquiry

ZLQ:k:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

h₁h₁n₁n₁:y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂

ZLQ:k:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁

d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

k=0 Record list

k=1 Event input log

k=2 Trouble log

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂:dddddddd

k=3 (Access log)

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁: Start date & time of

inquiry range

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂: End date & time of

inquiry range

dddddddd: Log data total number

Log readout

ZLR:yyyymmdd

hhnn:mmmmmmmm

ZLR:k:<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data

2>s2: :<Log Data

k=1 (Event input log)

k=2 (Trouble log)

k=3 (Access log)

...

n>sn

yyyymmddhhnn Start date & time of readout

logs

mmmmmmmm: Total number of acquired logs

(00000000 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data

sn: 0-9 Cyclic number

Record list acquisition

ZGR:yyyymmddnn

:nnnnnnnn

ZGR<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data

2>s2: :<Log Data n>sn

yyyymmddhhnn: Start date & time of readout

list

mmmmmmmm: Total record number in the

acquired list (00000001 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data

...

sn: 0-9 Cyclic number

Text acquisition

Text writing

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

<TEXT>: text data

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

<TEXT>: text data 200 bytes or less

Disk End Notification

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Disk end auto-notification MDE:n

setting

MDE:n

n=0 (Auto-notification OFF)

n=1 (Auto-notification ON)

Disk end auto-notification HDE:–

HDE:p

p=1 (Normal recording sector)

p=2 (Event recording sector)

p=3 (Copy sector)

146

Search Operation

Item

Display search editing

area

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

ZTL:n ZTL:n

Parameter (ASCII)

n=0 (Search editing area OFF)

n=1 (Recording event search list ON)

n=2 (Recording event search thumbnail ON)

n=3 (VMD search list ON)

n=4 (VMD Search Thumbnail OFF)

n=5 (Marking search list ON)

n=6 (Marking search thumbnail ON)

n=7 (Search playback display ON)

Display Operation

Item

Switch display

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

DIN:n DIN

Parameter (ASCII)

n=+

Inquiry

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Additional disk space

inquiry

QHR:p

QHR:p:sss

p=1 HDD normal recording sector

p=2 HDD event recording sector

p=3 HDD copy sector

p=4 Disk connected to COPY 1

p=5 Disk connected to COPY 2

sss: Additional disk space (%)

ID request

QID

QIB

QIC

QID:WJ-HD309

QID:WJ-HD316

Interface ID request

QIB:WJ-HD309

QIB:WJ-HD316

Production category

request

QIC:2

Alarm information request QLD:0

QLD:n

n=0 (No alarm)

n=1 (Alarm end)

n=2 (Under alarm operation)

Software version inquiry

Status inquiry

QRV

QSR

QRV:n.nn

QSR:Status 1:Status 2

n.nn: Software version

...

Following response commands are sends back

...

for "Status 1:Status 2

msu:0 Under normal operation

msu:1 Under setting

oms:0001 Monitor 1

oms:0002 Monitor 2

ocs:ccccc ccccc: Camera number

otc:n Multiscreen segment display pattern

n=0: 4 segments

n=1: 7segments

n=2: 9 segments

n=3: 10 segments

n=4: 13 segments

n=5: 16 segments

oqt: 01F Sequence activated

ozm: 0 Zoom OFF

ozm: 2 x2 zoom

ozm: 4 x4 zoom

mad: 0 Alarm suspension OFF

mad: 1 Alarm suspension ON

zcd: Cascade activated

zqs: 1 CH recording activated:2 CH recording

...

activated 16 CH recording activated

Recording status nn=00 (Recording stop)

nn=01 (Manual recording activated)

nn=02 (Event recording activated)

nn=03 (Schedule recording activated)

nn=04 (Emergency recording activated)

147

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

zqm: Monitor status: camera CH: Playback

time

Monitor status n=0 Live

n=1 Live sequence

n=2 Playback

n=3 Other statuses

Camera CH

Playback time: yyyymmddhhnnss

ztl:n Search editing area ON

n=0 Search editing area OFF

n=1 Recording event search list ON

n=2 Recording event search thumbnail

n=3 VMD search list ON

n=4 VMD search thumbnail ON

n=5 Marking search list ON

n=6 Marking search thumbnail ON

n=7 Search playback display ON

zdt:0 Text display OFF

zdt:1 Text display ON

Recording mode inquiry

Monitor status inquiry

QRM

ZQM

QRM:n

n=0 Normal recording mode

n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording

mode

ZQM:m:a₁a₂a₃a₄:yyyy

mmddhhnnss

m=0 Live

m=1 Live sequence

m=2 Playback

m=3 Other statuses

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Camera CH information (binary)

yyyymmddhhnnss: Playback time

Recording status inquiry

ZQS

ZQS:1 CH recording activated: Recording status nn=00 (Recording stop)

...

2 CH recording activated 16

nn=01 (Manual recording activated)

nn=02 (Event recording activated)

nn=03 (Schedule recording activated)

nn=04 (Emergency recording activated)

CH recording activated

Record number informa-

tion

–

ZRN:sss:nn:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

:nnyyyymmddhhnnss:

ccc:x;yyy:t

sss: Unit address

nn=Sequence number

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number

yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording event date and

time

ccc: Camera CH

x=0 Manual recording

x=1 Schedule recording

x=2 VMD recording

x=3 Alarm port recording

x=4 Command alarm recording

x=5 VIDEO LOSS recording

x=6 Emergency recording

yyy: Event-activated CH

t=0 Text included

t=1 Text not included

nn=Sequence number

Camera SYNC status

inquiry

QSY:a1a2a3a4a5

:b1b2b3b4b5

QSY:a₁a₂a₃a₄a₅

b₁b₂b₃b₄b₅:s₁s₂s₃sm

a₁a₂a₃a₄a₅- b₁b₂b₃b₄b₅: Range of camera CH

to inquire SYNC status

s₁s₂s₃sm: SYNC status of each camera

...

(s_m=0: SYNC status not found

s_m=1: SYNC status found)

148

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Record information

inquiry

ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:

ccc:q:nnnn:yyyymmdd

hhnnss:nnss:t:ssssss

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number

ccc: Camera CH

q: picture quality (0 (Very Fine), 1 (Fine), 2

(Normal), 3 (Extended))

nnnn: Recording rate

yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording start date and

time

nnss: Recording total time

t=0 Text included

t=1 Text not included

ssssss: Record size [KB]

Communication

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

RCK RCK

Parameter (ASCII)

Communication check

149

FLOWCHART OF THE SETUP MENU

Maintenance

REC Rate

Recording

REC Setup

Event

Event Setup

Schedule

Time Table

Event Setup

VMD

Maintenance

Disk Info

Recording

Emergency REC

Schedule

REC PROGRAM

Event Setup

Video Loss

REC PROGRAM

Recording Program

Maintenance

Version info

Schedule

EVENT PROGRAM

Event Setup

Terminal/Command

Alarm

EVENT PROGRAM

Event Program

Event

VMD Setup

Event Program

VMD

Maintenance

Disk End Mode

VMD Area Setup

For each camera

Event Program

Video Loss

Event

Alarm Setup

Maintenance

Disk Capacity

Event Program

Terminal/Command

Alarm

Event

Terminal Setup

Maintenance

Disk Delete

Schedule

Special Days

Maintenance

Event Log

Maintenance

Error Log

Maintenance

Access Log

Maintenance

Monitor 1

Display

OSD Setup

Comm

Camera Control

System

Basic Setup

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Camera Title

Live Sequence

Maintenance

Monitor 2

Display

Monitor 1

Comm

PS·Data Setup

System

Time & Date

Monitor 2

PS·Data Setup

Time & Date

Live Sequence

Camera Number Setup

Summer Time

(Day Light Saving)

Table

Display

Monitor 2

Comm

RS485 Setup

System

User Regist.

RS485 Setup

Control Camera CH

Comm

System

RS232 Setup

User Edit

Comm

System

NW Setup 1

User Delete

Comm

System

NW Setup 2

Host Regist.

Comm

System

NTP Setup

Host Edit

System

Host Delete

System

User Level

System

Save/Load

150

PARAMETERS AND THE DEFAULT SETTINGS OF THE SETUP MENU

These are the setting parameters and the default settings of the items on the SETUP MENU.

Refer to these as reference.

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Maintenance

Disk Info

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

10 000 h/20 000 h/30 000 h

ON/OFF

30 000 h

OFF

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

CONTINUE/STOP

OFF/1 %/2 %/···/10 %

CONTINUE

STOP

COPY1

STOP

COPY2

STOP

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

10 %

COPY1

10 %

COPY2

10 %

Auto Delete

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/···.../10DAYS/14DAYS/

30DAYS/45DAYS/60DAYS/90DAYS/

120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

OFF

Recording

REC Setup

Recording

ON/OFF

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Color Mode

ON/OFF

OFF

MON2/ALL

ALL

COLOR FINE/COLOR STD/B/W

ON/OFF

COLOR STD

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time & Date) ON/OFF

REC Priority

Manual REC/Schedule REC/Event REC

1: Event REC

2: Manual REC

3: Schedule REC

Audio Allocation

HD316: OFF/CAM1/CAM2.....CAM16

HD309: OFF/CAM1/.....CAM9

AUDIO1 to 4: OFF

FIELD

Emergency REC

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/SIF

Recording Time

1 s/2 s/..../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 m/2 m/..../10 m/

20 m/30 m/40 m/50 m/60 m/MANUAL/

CONTINUE

10 s

Recording Rate and Quality

Recording rate: 1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/

7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

Quality: SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/

EXA/EXB

Recording rate: 3 ips

Quality: SFA

OFF

Auto Copy

OFF/ON

151

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Event

Event Setup

Alarm Output

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m/

2 m/...../5 m/EXT

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: 2 s

Terminal Command Alarm: 2 s

Output Terminal

Buzzer

HD316: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM16

HD309: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM9

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m/

2 m/...../5 m/EXT

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: 2 s

Terminal Command Alarm: 2 s

Monitor1 Action

HD316: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with a video

loss occurrence

Terminal Command Alarm: Same number

for camera channel number and alarm

number

Monitor2 Action

HD316: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with a video

loss occurrence

Terminal Command Alarm: Same number

for camera channel number and alarm

number

VMD Setup

(SETUP AREA)

(SETUP ALL AREA)

(DELETE AREA)

(DELETE ALL AREA)

(SENSITIVITY)

(VMD MODE)

(EXIT)

Alarm Setup

Alarm Auto Reset

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/

OFF

4 m/5 m

Alarm Disarm Time

Terminal Setup

2 s/3 s/...../10 s

2 s

Terminal Setup

N.O./N.C.

N.O.

Schedule

Time Table

Period

12:00AM to 12:00AM

12:00AM to 12:00AM (Everyday/Time

zone1)

--:-- to --:-- (Except above)

REC PROGRAM

PROG1/PROG2/PROG3/PROG4

ON/OFF

PROG1

OFF

EVENT PROGRAM

FTP SEND BY PERIODIC

TIMER

ERROR REPORT MAIL

ON/OFF

OFF

WARNING REPORT MAIL

NW BANDWIDTH CONTROL

OFF/32kbps/64kbps/128kbps/256kbps/

512kbps/1024kbps/2Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps

Resolution

RATE

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/FRAME

FIELD

REC PROGRAM

OFF/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/

15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

Manual REC: 15 ips

Schedule REC: 15 ips

Event REC: 30 ips

RATE

OFF/AUTO/0.1 ips/0.2 ips/0.3 ips/0.4 ips/

0.5 ips/1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/

10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

MANUAL: AUTO

SCHEDULE: AUTO

EVENT (PRE): 1 ips

EVENT (POST): 1 ips

QUALITY

SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB

SFA

DURATION (TIME for the unit) 1 s/2 s/...../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 m/2 m,/...../

10 m/20 m/...../60 m/MANUAL/CONTINUE

EVENT (PRE): 10 s

EVENT (POST): 30 s

152

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

EVENT PROGRAM Action Mode (The unit)

ALARM/ACT DET

ON/OFF

ALARM

OFF

REC CH

Auto Copy

ON/OFF

Preset Position

Serial Notice

Mail Notice

--/1/2/...../64

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

FTP Alarm Sending

ON/OFF

Special Days

DATE

Mode

1/1 to 12/31

MON/TUE/WED/THU/FRI/SAT/SUN

Switcher

Monitor1

Live Sequence

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

1/2/...../15/16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

[Operating via a network]

HD316: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP16: CAM16

HD309: STEP1: CAM1,

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP9:CAM9

--/1/2/...../64

1 s/2 s/...../30 s

2 s

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

INT/EXT/MON2

ON/OFF

INT

OFF

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

16SCREEN

Secret View

ON/OFF

OFF

Monitor2

Live Sequence

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

1/2/...../15/16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

[Operating via a network]

HD316: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, .....STEP16:CAM16

HD309: STEP1: CAM1,

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

STEP2: CAM2, ..... STEP9:CAM9

--/1/2/...../64

1 s/2 s/...../30 s

2 s

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

INT/EXT

INT

ON/OFF

OFF

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD1-4

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

Display

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER/

CENTER

Line Color on the Multi Screen WHITE/GRAY/BLACK

WHITE

Monitor1

Monitor2

Time & Date Display

Camera Title Display

Alarm Display

ON/OFF

Display Mode

MODE1/MODE2/MODE3

UPPER/LOWER

MODE1

LOWER

T&D and Status Display

Position

Camera Title Display

ON/OFF

153

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Com

Camera Control

COMP

TYPE

S/M/L

HD316: CAM1to CAM8: S

HD309: CAM1 to CAM6: S

HD316: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX/RS485/OFF,

CAM9 to CAM12: RS485/PSD/OFF,

CAM13 to CAM16: RS485/PSD/OFF

HD309: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX/RS485/OFF,

CAM7 to CAM9: RS485/PSD/OFF

HD316: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX,

CAM9 to CAM12: RS485,

CAM13 to CAM16: RS485

HD309: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX,

CAM7 to CAM9: RS485

PS·Data Setup

Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

001 to 099

001

OFF

9 600

001 to 099

ON/OFF

Baud Rate

2 400/4 800/9 600/19 200/38 400

Data Bit

Parity

NONE/EVEN/ODD

NONE

Stop Bit

1/2

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1000 ms/

OFF/0 s/1 s/5 s

OFF

1 s

Camera Number Setup

001 to 099

HD316: 1: 001 to 16: 016

HD309: 1: 001 to 9: 009

RS485 Setup

Baud Rate

4 800/9 600/19 200

PORT1/PORT2

9 600

Control Camera CH

HD316: CAM1 to CAM8: PORT1,

CAM9 to CAM16: PORT2

HD309: CAM1 to CAM9: PORT1

Data Bit

Parity

NONE

Stop Bit

RS232C Setup

NW Setup1

NW Setup2

Unit Address(System)

Baud Rate

Data Bit

001 to 099

001

9 600/19 200/38 400

9 600

7/8

Parity

NONE/EVEN/ODD

NONE

Stop Bit

1/2

Retry Timing

HTTP Port Number

User Authentication

Host Authentication

Line Speed

Live Video Quality

Video Rate

DHCP

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1000 ms/

OFF

00000 to 65535

00080

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

AUTO

FQB

FAST/MIDDLE/SLOW/VERY SLOW

MIDDLE

ON/OFF

OFF

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

192.168.0.250

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

255.255.255.000

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

192.168.000.001

DNS

ON/OFF

OFF

Primary

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000

Secondary

DDNS

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000

ON/OFF

OFF

User Name

User Password

Access Interval

Host Name

10 m/30 m/1 h/6 h/24 h

1 h

HD316: HD316

HD309: HD309

Domain Name

localdomain

154

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Network SNMP

Setup

COMMUNITY

public

CONTACT

SYSTEM NAME

LOCATION

NTP Setup

Time Adjustment

Time Zone

ON/OFF

OFF

GMT-12:00/GMT-11:00/...../GMT-4:00/GMT-3:30/

GMT-3:00/...../GMT-1:00/GMT 0:00/GMT+1:00/

GMT+2:00/...../GMT+9:00/GMT+9:30/

GMT+10:00/...../GMT+13:00

GMT-5:00

NTP Server Address

Refresh Interval

1 h/2 h/6 h/12 h/24 h

6 h

Network FTP Setup FTP Server Address

User Name

User Password

Mode

SEQUENTIAL/PASSIVE

SEQUENTIAL

Server Directory

File Name

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

TIME & DATE BASE

Interval

01 s

Channel to Send

Server Directory

File Name

CAM1 to CAM16

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

TIME & DATE BASE

Duration-Pre

OFF/1 s/2 s/3 s/4 s/5 s/6 s/7 s/8 s/9 s/10 s

OFF

Duration-Post

OFF/1 s/2 s/3 s/4 s/5 s/6 s/7 s/8 s/9 s/10 s

5 s

Network Mail Setup Attach Alarm Image

Mail Server Address

Send to

ON/OFF

OFF

Address1

From Address

POP before SMTP

POP Server Address

User Name

ON/OFF

OFF

User Password

System

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

PSD User

12345

ADMIN

Auto Login

ON/OFF

Auto Login User

Auto Logout

Priority

ADMIN

ON/OFF

OFF

Follow the priority./Pre-priority/Post-priority

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 m/5 m

Follow the priority.

5 s

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/

DEUTSCH/ITALIANO

ENGLISH

Beep (Operation)

Buzzer (Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

ON/OFF

OFF/1 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m/...../5 m/EXT

10 s/20 s/30 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m

ON/OFF

2 s

10 s

OFF

155

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Time & Date

Date Format

Time Format

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

YY.MM.DD/MMM.DD.YY/DD.MMM.YY

24 h/12 h

MMM.DD.YY

12 h

ON/OFF

OFF

0:00/1:00/...../23:00

0:00

Summer Time(Day Light Saving) ON/OFF/AUTO

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

OFF

Table

User Regist.

User Edit

User Name

Password

Level

User Delete

1/2/3

1/2/...../16

Priority

Default Screen

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ

CAM1

Camera Partitioning

Host IP Address

Level

--/View/View/Operate

View/Operate

Host Regist.

Host Edit

1/2/3

Host Delete

Priority

1/2/...../16

Default Screen

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ

CAM1

Camera Partitioning

WJ-HD300 Setup

WJ-HD300 Setup Status

Camera Setup

--/View/View/Operate

LV1,LV2,LV3

View/Operate

LV1

User Level

LV1,LV2

LV1

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

LV1,LV2

LV1

Alarm Reset

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

LV1

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

LV1

LV1,LV2

LV1,LV2,LV3

156

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check to see the following before request for repair.

Contact your dealer if a trouble cannot be solved even after checking and trying solution.

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if the power plug is surely connected to the AC out-

let.

–

Power is not turned on.

• Check if the power cord is surely inserted into the power

socket of the unit.

–

The HDD SAFETY MODE win-

dow is displayed after turning

on the power of the unit.

• The HDD SAFETY MODE is set to ON.

In this case, set the HDD SAFETY MODE to OFF.

Refer to p. 67.

• Check if the lens covers of the cameras have been

removed.

–

• Check if the power is supplied to cameras and connected

devices.

No camera image is displayed

on MON 1, MON 2, and the

VGA monitor

Refer to p. 69.

–

• Check if the cable connections are correct.

• Check the brightness and contrast settings of monitors.

Refer to p. 122

and 124.

• Can the users display camera images on monitors?

Check the level settings of users logging in.

The log-in menu does not

appear even if you press the

button of the unit.

• Check if no user has logged in with the system controller.

• Check if dust may not be sticking on the camera lens.

–

The camera image is dim.

Refer to p. 122

and 124.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

display SETUP MENU on monitors?

Cannot open SETUP MENU.

• Check if the monitor 1 is used to display the SETUP

MENU. The SETUP MENU cannot be displayed on the

monitor 1.

Refer to page

11.

157

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if the HDD has an available disk space.

Refer to p. 94.

• Check if the recording setup is set to ON.

• Check the schedule settings.

Refer to p. 97.

Refer to p. 104.

Refer to p. 97.

Cannot start recording.

• Check the recording priority settings.

• When the setting menu is displayed by non-interlace sig-

nal, the setting menu may be unable to function normally.

Since the setting menu of the matrix switcher is displayed

by non-interlace signal, recording or displaying with this

unit may be impossible.

Cannot record the SETUP

MENU of a matrix switcher

–

• Check if images have been recorded in the HDD.

Refer to p. 28.

Refer to p. 122

and 124.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

record images?

Cannot playback images.

Refer to p. 122

and 124.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

display camera images on monitors?

• Check the connection of camera you are going to control.

Coaxial communication control is available for cameras

connected to VIDEO IN 1 to 8 for WJ-HD316 (1 to 6 for

the WJ-HD309).

Refer to p. 69.

• Check if the camera you are going to control is a combina-

tion camera.

Refer to p. 69.

Refer to p. 115.

Cannot control cameras.

• Check the camera control settings.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

control cameras?

Refer to p. 122

and 124.

• Check the BUSY indicator. When the indicator is lighting,

a higher-priority user is controlling cameras. You cannot

control cameras until the indicator goes out.

Refer to p. 9.

158

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if alarm input signals are properly input to the

ALARM or ALARM/CONTROL at the rear panel.

Refer to p. 82

and 86.

Alarm operations are not acti-

vated.

Refer to p. 86.

Refer to p. 106.

• Check the settings of the ALARM connector.

• Check if the operation mode is set to ALARM (alarm

mode).

• Check the camera connections.

Refer to p. 69.

"VIDEO LOSS" appears on the

monitor.

• If the camera connections are proper, refer to the dealer.

Cable wires may be snapped or the unit may have trou-

ble.

–

• Check if the ambient operating temperature is between

+5°C and +45 °C.

• When the inside of unit exceeds 45 °C, "THERMAL" may

appear even within the ambient temperature mentioned

above.

Refer to p. 6

and 14.

"THERMAL" appears on the

monitor.

• If "THERMAL" frequently appear on monitors, refer to the

dealer. The unit may have trouble.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been charged

enough. If not so, supply power to the unit for 48 hours or

more to recharge the battery.

Refer to p. 6.

The clock does not keep cor-

rect time.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been worn out.

The battery can endure for approx. 5 years. (The

endurance may differ depending on conditions.)

• Check if HDDs were added or removed. If so, the HDD

DISK MENU will be displayed automatically.

Refer to p. 130.

When you power on the unit,

HDD DISK MENU is displayed.

• If the HDD DISK MENU is displayed even though no

HDDs were added or removed, Refer to the dealer. The

HDD may have trouble.

–

159

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if "Disk End Mode" is set to STOP.

Refer to p. 94.

The additional disk space of

HDD is not displayed.

–

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

• Check if the "Disk End Mode" is set to STOP.

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

Refer to p. 94.

The available disk space of

HDD is not displayed on the

right bar.

–

Refer to the

• Check the network settings of the unit and PC.

Network Setup

Instructions (PDF).

Cannot establish the connec-

tion via the network.

• Check the host registration setting. When host authentica-

tion is set to ON, you cannot establish the connection

from computers other than the PC registered as the host.

Refer to p. 123.

Response or Image update

takes time.

–

• Check if the network is crowded.

Inspect the power cord, power plug and connectors periodically.

The power cord insulation is

damaged.

• The power cord, plug and connectors are worn out. This may result in electric

shock or a fire. Unplug the power plug from the AC outlet immediately, and

refer to qualified service personnel.

The power cord, plug and con-

nectors get hot during the use.

The power cord gets heat when

bent or stretched.

160

SPECIFICATION

General

Power source:

120 V AC, 60 Hz

85 W

Power consumption

Ambient operating

temperature

+5°C to +45°C

Ambient operating

humidity

Less than 90 %

Dimensions

420 mm (W) X 88 mm (H) X 350 mm (D) [16-9/16" (W) X 3-7/16" (H) X

13-3/4" (D)] (excluding rubber feet and projections)

Weight

9.5 kg (21 lbs.)

Input/Output

Video

Video input connectors

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, with auto termination loop-thru, vertical timing pulse mul-

tiplexed, x8 (1 to 8 CH) (BNC)

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, with auto-termination loop-thru,

x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

Cascade input connector 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω (BNC)

Video output connectors 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (1 to 8 CH) (BNC)*

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

Monitor output connectors 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x2 (BNC)

Monitor output connector RGB output, x1 (15-pin D-sub)

(VGA)

S-video output connector Y = 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, C=0.286 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x1 (S-video output connec-

tor)

Video output connector

(front panel)

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x1 (RCA pin)

Audio

Audio input connectors

Audio output connectors

Expansion connector

Copy connectors

–10 dB, 10 KΩ, x4 (RCA pin)

–10 dB, 600 Ω, unbalanced, x2 (RCA pin)

Others

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x1

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x2

Control connectors

Emergency recording input*², additional space warning output*³(for

devices connected to copy connectors), HDD trouble output*³, camera

trouble output*³, trouble output*³, electricity failure recovery completion

output*⁴, time adjust input/output*⁵, sequence switching input/output*⁵,

electricity failure detection input*², external recording mode switching*²

(25-pin D-sub) , +5 V output *⁷

Alarm port

1 to 8 CH alarm input*⁶, 1 to 16 CH alarm input*², 1 to 16 alarm output*³,

alarm recovery input*², alarm suspension input*⁵(25-pin D-sub)

RS-485 ports

DATA ports

RS-485 (full duplex/half duplex*⁸), x2 (RJ-11)

RS-485, x2 (RJ-11)

SERIAL connector

Ethernet port

RS-232C, x1 (9-pin D-sub)

10 Base-T/100 Base-Tx (RJ-45)

When power is not supplied, video output signal was not sent from the unit even if video input signal is supplied.

Non-voltage N.O. Contact, 100 mA, +5 V pull-up

Open collector output, maximum under conditions of 24 V DC and 100 mA or less

High (+12 V, 6.3 mA)

30 KΩ, 5 V pull-up, –100 mA, N.O. Contact

5 V pull-up, –100 mA, Non-voltage N.O. Contact input

200 mA at maximum

Changeable with the mode switch

161

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

CD-ROM* ............................................................................ 1

Operating Instructions (this manual) .................................. 1

Warranty ............................................................................. 1

The following are for installation:

Power Cord ......................................................................... 1

Rack Mounting Bracket ...................................................... 2

Screw for Rack Mounting Bracket ...................................... 4

Cable Clamp ....................................................................... 1

Screw for Cable Clamp ...................................................... 1

Hard Disk Drive Fixing Screw ............................................. 4

*The following are included on the CD-ROM:

Viewer software

Plug-in software

Network Operating Instructions (PDF)

Network Setup Operations (PDF)

162

163

PANASONIC CANADA INC.

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga,

Panasonic Digital Communications & Security Company

Unit of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America

Ontario, L4W 2T3 Canada (905)624-5010

PANASONIC SALES COMPANY

DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC OF PUERTO RICO INC.

San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave. KM. 9.5 Carolina,

P.R. 00985 (809)750-4300

Security Systems Group

www.panasonic.com/cctv

Executive Office: One Panasonic Way 3E-7, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Zone Office

Eastern: One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7303

Central: 1707 N.Randal Road, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5205

Western: 6550 Katella Ave., Cypress, CA 90630 (714) 373-7840

NM0104-0

3TR001706AAA

Printed in Japan

JVC AV 24F702 User Manual
JVC DT V24L3DY User Manual
KitchenAid KECC507BBL1 User Manual
Lincoln Impinger Conveyor Ovens 1421 000 E User Manual
Memorex MT2274A User Manual
Moffat RN8806G RB User Manual
Motorola SATELLITE 9505 User Manual
NEC LCD2690W2 BK S User Manual
Philips Cordless Telephone CD360 User Manual
Philips KX TG2247 User Manual